TS422

SAP S/4HANA Production Planning

& Manufacturing Academy
Part_II_1/2

.
.
EXERCISES AND SOLUTIONS
.
Course Version: 12
Course Duration: 15 Hours 5 Minutes
SAP Copyrights, Trademarks and
Disclaimers

© 2019 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the
express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are
trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other
countries. Please see [Link] for additional
trademark information and notices.
Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors.
National product specifications may vary.
This course may have been machine translated and may contain grammatical errors or inaccuracies.
These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only,
without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP SE or its affiliated companies shall not be liable
for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP SE or SAP affiliate
company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty.
In particular, SAP SE or its affiliated companies have no obligation to pursue any course of business
outlined in this document or any related presentation, or to develop or release any functionality
mentioned therein. This document, or any related presentation, and SAP SE’s or its affiliated companies’
strategy and possible future developments, products, and/or platform directions and functionality are
all subject to change and may be changed by SAP SE or its affiliated companies at any time for any
reason without notice. The information in this document is not a commitment, promise, or legal
obligation to deliver any material, code, or functionality. All forward-looking statements are subject to
various risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from expectations.
Readers are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements, which speak
only as of their dates, and they should not be relied upon in making purchasing decisions.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. iii

Typographic Conventions

American English is the standard used in this handbook.

The following typographic conventions are also used.

This information is displayed in the instructor’s presentation

Demonstration

Procedure

Warning or Caution

Hint

Related or Additional Information

Facilitated Discussion

User interface control Example text

Window title Example text

© Copyright. All rights reserved. iv

Contents

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

1 Exercise 1: Login to SAP Systems and Access the SAP Fiori

Launchpad
5 Exercise 2: Analyze Master Data
18 Exercise 3: Create Planned Independent Requirements, Run MRP,
and Convert a Planned Order

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

24 Exercise 4: Execute a Production Order

33 Exercise 5: Analyze the Production Order Structure

Unit 3: Order Creation

48 Exercise 6: Create Production Orders by Planned Order Conversion

58 Exercise 7: Create a Production Order with Material and Copy a
Production Order
62 Exercise 8: Create a Production Order without Material
66 Exercise 9: Create Production Orders for Sales Orders
79 Exercise 10: Define an Order Type
83 Exercise 11: Analyze Master Data Selection
100 Exercise 12: Set Up and Analyze Scheduling
109 Exercise 13: Analyze the Calculation of the Planned Costs

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and

Printing

116 Exercise 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

139 Exercise 15: Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling Tools
154 Exercise 16: Release Production Orders
163 Exercise 17: Define and Test a Production Scheduling Profile
170 Exercise 18: Analyze and Test a User Status Profile
179 Exercise 19: Print Shop Floor Papers

Unit 5: Order Execution

191 Exercise 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and
with the Picking List
214 Exercise 21: Stage Materials with the Pull List
226 Exercise 22: Post Goods Issues via Backflushing
231 Exercise 23: Stage Materials with KANBAN
245 Exercise 24: Check the Customizing Settings for Confirmations
249 Exercise 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders
286 Exercise 26: Post Goods Receipts

© Copyright. All rights reserved. v

 Unit 6: Order Settlement, Archiving, and Deletion

306 Exercise 27: Settle a Production Order

314 Exercise 28: Archive and Delete a Production Order

Unit 7: Information Systems, Mass Processing, and Automation

322 Exercise 29: Analyze Production Data with the Order Information
System
324 Exercise 30: Get an Overview of the Mass Processing Functions
326 Exercise 31: Execute a Trigger Point

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

332 Exercise 32: Split Production Orders

346 Exercise 33: Create Shift Notes and Shift Reports

© Copyright. All rights reserved. vi

 Unit 1
Exercise 1
Login to SAP Systems and Access the SAP
Fiori Launchpad

Business Scenario
In your company, you are responsible for the processing of production orders. You log on to
the corresponding SAP systems and open the SAP Fiori Launchpad. You use apps in the SAP
Fiori Launchpad or transactions in the SAP S/4HANA backend server to maintain and analyze
data or to perform business processes.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Note:
In the case of other systems or users in a special system landscape you would be
informed by the trainer.

Task 1: Log on to the SAP systems and open the SAP Fiori Launchpad

1. The trainer will give you the information how to log on to the training system environment.
In the training system environment, choose the SAP Logon to log on to the following
training systems:
System Client User Password

T41 (SAP S/4HANA 400 S4225-## Welcome1

backend server)

T4N (gateway serv- 001 S4225-## Welcome1

er)

2. In the gateway server, open the SAP Fiori Launchpad. You find the corresponding
transaction in your Favorites folder or in your User Menu.

Task 2: Use apps in the SAP Fiori Launchpad

Depending on the tasks you have to do in your day-to-day business, you use apps in the SAP
Fiori Launchpad or transactions in the SAP S/4HANA backend server to maintain and analyze
data or to perform business processes.

1. The SAP Fiori Launchpad contains apps that you need for the areas of your responsibility.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 1

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

Note:
In the gateway server, these apps are assigned to a corresponding role, and
this role is assigned to your user.

Open for example the Stock app by choosing the corresponding tile in the tile group S4225
Inventory & Warehouse Management and analyze the stock for material T-RSP1##.

2. You can personalize your Launchpad. Create for example a new tile group and assign tiles
to it.
Choose the person icon in the left upper corner. Then choose Edit Home Page.
Choose Add Group and enter the group name S4225 Example Group.
In your new group, click on the empty tile to open the App Finder. Add some apps to your
group.
Then choose Back in the left upper corner to switch back to the group maintenance.
Choose Close to save your changes.

3. In certain cases, you want to maintain data or execute functions directly in the SAP S/
4HANA backend system.
In the backend system, choose for example transaction CA03 to analyze the data of the
routing for material T-FSP1## in plant 1010.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 2

 Unit 1
Solution 1
Login to SAP Systems and Access the SAP
Fiori Launchpad

Business Scenario
In your company, you are responsible for the processing of production orders. You log on to
the corresponding SAP systems and open the SAP Fiori Launchpad. You use apps in the SAP
Fiori Launchpad or transactions in the SAP S/4HANA backend server to maintain and analyze
data or to perform business processes.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Note:
In the case of other systems or users in a special system landscape you would be
informed by the trainer.

Task 1: Log on to the SAP systems and open the SAP Fiori Launchpad

1. The trainer will give you the information how to log on to the training system environment.
In the training system environment, choose the SAP Logon to log on to the following
training systems:
System Client User Password

T41 (SAP S/4HANA 400 S4225-## Welcome1

backend server)

T4N (gateway serv- 001 S4225-## Welcome1

er)

a) Ask the trainer for help if you have problems with the login processes.

2. In the gateway server, open the SAP Fiori Launchpad. You find the corresponding
transaction in your Favorites folder or in your User Menu.
a) Ask the trainer for help if you have problems to open the Launchpad.

Task 2: Use apps in the SAP Fiori Launchpad

Depending on the tasks you have to do in your day-to-day business, you use apps in the SAP
Fiori Launchpad or transactions in the SAP S/4HANA backend server to maintain and analyze
data or to perform business processes.

1. The SAP Fiori Launchpad contains apps that you need for the areas of your responsibility.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 3

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

Note:
In the gateway server, these apps are assigned to a corresponding role, and
this role is assigned to your user.

Open for example the Stock app by choosing the corresponding tile in the tile group S4225
Inventory & Warehouse Management and analyze the stock for material T-RSP1##.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. You can personalize your Launchpad. Create for example a new tile group and assign tiles
to it.
Choose the person icon in the left upper corner. Then choose Edit Home Page.
Choose Add Group and enter the group name S4225 Example Group.
In your new group, click on the empty tile to open the App Finder. Add some apps to your
group.
Then choose Back in the left upper corner to switch back to the group maintenance.
Choose Close to save your changes.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In certain cases, you want to maintain data or execute functions directly in the SAP S/
4HANA backend system.
In the backend system, choose for example transaction CA03 to analyze the data of the
routing for material T-FSP1## in plant 1010.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 4

 Unit 1
Exercise 2
Analyze Master Data

Business Scenario
Your company manufactures bicycles. As a production engineer, you will analyze the
corresponding master data.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Analyze BOM Structure and Material Master

You analyze the multilevel BOM structure of your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special and
check the material master data settings.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Multilevel BOM tile to analyze the multilevel BOM
structure of your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
A new tab with the title Explode BOM: Multilevel BOM: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##
Plant 1010
Alternative BOM 1
BOM Application PP01

2. In the Display Multilevel BOM screen, check the multilevel BOM structure for material T-
FSP1##. Note the BOM structure in the following table:
Field Value

Material
Description
Base Qty (PC)

Level no. Component Object description Comp. Qty Un Ict

number

.1
..2
..2

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 5

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

Level no. Component Object description Comp. Qty Un Ict

number

..2
...3
....4
....4
...3
.1
..2
..2
.1
.1

Close the Display Multilevel BOM screen.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Bill of Material tile to display the BOM of
material T-FSP1##.
A new tab with the title Display material BOM: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##
Plant 1010
BOM Usage 1
Alternative BOM 1

4. In the Display Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, first check the components of
the BOM.
Then double-click material T-FSP1## Bike Special to display the material master of the
product.
In the Display Material T-FSP1## (Finished Product) screen, choose the MRP 4 view for
plant 1010.
Push the ProdVersions button to check, whether a production version is defined.

Field Value

Version

Display Details of the product version.

5. In the Display Material T-FSP1## (Finished Product) screen, choose the Additional Data
button, and display the Document data view.
What document is linked to the material?

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 6

 Exercise 2: Analyze Master Data

Document

>

Finally close the material display.

Task 2: Analyze Routing and Work Centers

You analyze the routing for your finished product T-FSP1## and check the master data
settings of the work centers.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Routing tile to display the routing for
material T-FSP1##.
A new tab with the title Display Routing: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the Display Routing: Initial Screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##
Plant 1010

2. In the Display Routing: Operation Overview screen, note some information on the
operations in the following table:
Operat. Work Center Control key PRT

>
>
>

3. Now select all operations and double-click the number of the first operation to display the
Operation Details screen:
Check for each operation the standard values and the interoperation times.

4. Try to get detailed information on the settings of control key YBP1. Note some of the
settings in the following table:
Field Value

Scheduling
Det. Cap. Reqmnts
Cost
Automatic GR
Print
Confirmations

5. In the Operation Overview screen, choosePRT for operation 0020, or double-click the PRT
indicator to display the PRT Overview.
Note the PRTs assigned to operation 0020 in the following table.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 7

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

Item Cat PRT

>
>

6. In the Operation Overview screen, choose More → Goto → Trigger Point Overview for
operation 0030 to display the Operation Trigger Points.
Note the Trigger Point assigned to operation 0030 in the following table:

Description Functions

>

7. In the Operation Overview screen, choose Sequences to display the Sequence Overview.
In addition to the standard sequence, are there also alternative or parallel sequences?

8. Now you want to analyze the master data of a work center.

In the Operation Overview screen, double-click on a work center.
In the Display Work Center: Basic Data screen, check the available standard values:
Key Word

>
>
>

9. In the Display Work Center: Capacity Overview screen, check the formulas for calculating
the capacity requirements for setup and processing of an operation.

10. In the Display Work Center: Capacity Overview screen, double-click a capacity category to
display the Display Work Center Capacity: Header screen.
Check the available capacity:

Field Value

Start Time
End Time
Length of breaks

11. In the Display Work Center: Scheduling screen, check the formulas for calculating the
durations for setup and processing of an operation.

12. In the Display Work Center: Cost Center Assignment screen, check which cost center is
assigned to the work center and which activity types for calculating the production costs
of an operation are assigned to the standard values.
Field Value

Cost Center

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 8

 Exercise 2: Analyze Master Data

Alt. Activity Text Activity Type

Setup
Machine
Labor

Finally close the work center display.

Task 3: Analyze Stocks and Post Goods Receipts for Material Components
In the following exercises, we assume that the stocks of the material components required to
produce the finished product T-FSP1## have been procured in sufficient quantities.
You check the stocks of the material components and fill them up to 2000 PC each.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stocks
of the material components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-SSP1##.
Check the stock for storage location 101B. Select this storage location and choose Manage
Stock
In the Manage Stock screen, choose the Unrestricted-Use Stock button.
In the Manage Stock dialog box, make the following entries:
Field Value

Stock Change: Initial Entry

Quantity Quantity required to fill up the stock to 2000 PC

Post the goods receipt.

Repeat the upper steps also for the material components T-SSP2## and T-RSP1##.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 9

 Unit 1
Solution 2
Analyze Master Data

Business Scenario
Your company manufactures bicycles. As a production engineer, you will analyze the
corresponding master data.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Analyze BOM Structure and Material Master

You analyze the multilevel BOM structure of your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special and
check the material master data settings.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Multilevel BOM tile to analyze the multilevel BOM
structure of your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
A new tab with the title Explode BOM: Multilevel BOM: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##
Plant 1010
Alternative BOM 1
BOM Application PP01

a) Enter the values given in the table and choose Execute.

2. In the Display Multilevel BOM screen, check the multilevel BOM structure for material T-
FSP1##. Note the BOM structure in the following table:
Field Value

Material
Description
Base Qty (PC)

Level no. Component Object description Comp. Qty Un Ict

number

.1

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 10

 Solution 2: Analyze Master Data

Level no. Component Object description Comp. Qty Un Ict

number

..2

..2
..2
...3
....4
....4
...3
.1
..2
..2
.1
.1

Close the Display Multilevel BOM screen.

a) You should see the following BOM structure:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##
Description Bike Special
Base Qty (PC) 1

Level no. Component Object description Comp. Qty Un Ict

number

.1 T-SSP1## Frame 1 PC L
..2 T-RSP5## Metal Tube 1 PC L
..2 T-RSP6## Seat Metal Tube 1 PC L
..2 T-SSP3## Bike Paint Red 0,1 L L
...3 T-SPT1## Basic Paint 0,1 L L
....4 T-RPT3## Basic Paint Mix 0,01 KG L
....4 T-RPT4## Solvent Mix 0,1 L L
...3 T-RPT2## Pigment Red 0,01 KG L
.1 T-SSP2## Wheel 2 PC L
..2 T-RSP7## Rim with Spokes 2 PC L
..2 T-RSP8## Tyre and Tube 2 PC L

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 11

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

Level no. Component Object description Comp. Qty Un Ict

number

.1 T-RSP1## Chain 1 PC L

.1 T-DSP100 Bike Standard Assembly 1 PC D

Instruction

b) Choose Close Tab, to close the Display Multilevel BOM screen.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Bill of Material tile to display the BOM of
material T-FSP1##.
A new tab with the title Display material BOM: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##
Plant 1010
BOM Usage 1
Alternative BOM 1

a) Enter the values given in the table and choose Enter.

4. In the Display Material BOM: General Item Overview screen, first check the components of
the BOM.
Then double-click material T-FSP1## Bike Special to display the material master of the
product.
In the Display Material T-FSP1## (Finished Product) screen, choose the MRP 4 view for
plant 1010.
Push the ProdVersions button to check, whether a production version is defined.

Field Value

Version

Display Details of the product version.

a) The following production version should be defined:
Field Value

Version 0001

In the Production Version Overview window, choose Details to display the Production
Version Detail view.

5. In the Display Material T-FSP1## (Finished Product) screen, choose the Additional Data
button, and display the Document data view.
What document is linked to the material?

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 12

 Solution 2: Analyze Master Data

Document

>

Finally close the material display.

a) The following document should be linked to the material:
Document

T-DSP200

b) Choose Close Tab to close the material display.

Task 2: Analyze Routing and Work Centers

You analyze the routing for your finished product T-FSP1## and check the master data
settings of the work centers.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Routing tile to display the routing for
material T-FSP1##.
A new tab with the title Display Routing: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the Display Routing: Initial Screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##
Plant 1010

a) Enter the values given in the table and choose Enter.

2. In the Display Routing: Operation Overview screen, note some information on the
operations in the following table:
Operat. Work Center Control key PRT

>
>
>

a) You should find the following information:

Operat. Work Center Control key PRT

0010 T-BK1## YBP1

0020 T-BK2## YBP1 X
0030 T-BK3## YBP1

3. Now select all operations and double-click the number of the first operation to display the
Operation Details screen:
Check for each operation the standard values and the interoperation times.
a) Choose Next Operation or Previous Operation to navigate from operation to operation.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 13

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

4. Try to get detailed information on the settings of control key YBP1. Note some of the
settings in the following table:
Field Value

Scheduling
Det. Cap. Reqmnts
Cost
Automatic GR
Print
Confirmations

a) In the Operation Overview screen, set the cursor on a control key and choose F4.
Right click Control Key , then select Next Page until you'll be able to select control key
YBP1 .
Set the cursor on the control key and choose Detailed Information.
You should find the following settings:

Field Value

Scheduling X
Det. Cap. Reqmnts X
Cost X
Automatic GR
Print X
Confirmations 2 (Confirmation required)

5. In the Operation Overview screen, choosePRT for operation 0020, or double-click the PRT
indicator to display the PRT Overview.
Note the PRTs assigned to operation 0020 in the following table.

Item Cat PRT

>
>

a) You should find the following PRTs:

Item Cat PRT

0010 O T-PRT100
0020 D T-DSP100

6. In the Operation Overview screen, choose More → Goto → Trigger Point Overview for
operation 0030 to display the Operation Trigger Points.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 14

 Solution 2: Analyze Master Data

Note the Trigger Point assigned to operation 0030 in the following table:

Description Functions

>

a) You should find the following Trigger Point:

Description Functions

Rework x

7. In the Operation Overview screen, choose Sequences to display the Sequence Overview.
In addition to the standard sequence, are there also alternative or parallel sequences?
a) No, in this routing no alternative or parallel sequences are defined.

8. Now you want to analyze the master data of a work center.

In the Operation Overview screen, double-click on a work center.
In the Display Work Center: Basic Data screen, check the available standard values:
Key Word

>
>
>

a) The following standard values are available:

Key Word

Setup
Machine
Labor

9. In the Display Work Center: Capacity Overview screen, check the formulas for calculating
the capacity requirements for setup and processing of an operation.
a) To display a formula, choose More → Extras → Formula → Display...

10. In the Display Work Center: Capacity Overview screen, double-click a capacity category to
display the Display Work Center Capacity: Header screen.
Check the available capacity:

Field Value

Start Time
End Time
Length of breaks

a) The work center has the following available capacity:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 15

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

Field Value

Start Time [Link]

End Time [Link]
Length of breaks [Link]

11. In the Display Work Center: Scheduling screen, check the formulas for calculating the
durations for setup and processing of an operation.
a) To display a formula, click the Information button.

12. In the Display Work Center: Cost Center Assignment screen, check which cost center is
assigned to the work center and which activity types for calculating the production costs
of an operation are assigned to the standard values.
Field Value

Cost Center

Alt. Activity Text Activity Type

Setup
Machine
Labor

Finally close the work center display.

a) You should find the following assignments:
Field Value

Cost Center 10101301

Alt. Activity Text Activity Type

Setup 3
Machine 1
Labor 11

b) Choose Close Tab to close the work center display.

Task 3: Analyze Stocks and Post Goods Receipts for Material Components
In the following exercises, we assume that the stocks of the material components required to
produce the finished product T-FSP1## have been procured in sufficient quantities.
You check the stocks of the material components and fill them up to 2000 PC each.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stocks
of the material components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-SSP1##.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 16

 Solution 2: Analyze Master Data

Check the stock for storage location 101B. Select this storage location and choose Manage
Stock
In the Manage Stock screen, choose the Unrestricted-Use Stock button.
In the Manage Stock dialog box, make the following entries:
Field Value

Stock Change: Initial Entry

Quantity Quantity required to fill up the stock to 2000 PC

Post the goods receipt.

Repeat the upper steps also for the material components T-SSP2## and T-RSP1##.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 17

 Unit 1
Exercise 3
Create Planned Independent Requirements,
Run MRP, and Convert a Planned Order

Business Scenario
Based on sales forecasts, a planner specifies requirements for the make-to-stock (MTS)
production of the bicycles. An MRP controller schedules an MRP run, checks the result, and
converts planned orders to production orders.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create Planned Independent Requirements

As a planner, you create planned independent requirements for the finished product T-
FSP1## Bike Special.
Previously, you set up a preferred planning strategy for MTS production in the material
master.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Material tile to set up the MTS planning
strategy 40 Planning with final assembly for your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
Enter the material number in the initial screen, then choose view MRP 3 for plant 1010.
In the MRP 3 view, assign strategy group 40 Planning with final assembly.
Save the material and choose Exit to leave the material master maintenance.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage PIRs tile to create planned independent
requirements for your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
When you start an MRP app for the first time, you must specify a combination of plant and
MRP controller.
Choose Plant 1010 / MRP Controller P##.

Note:
In the app, you can change the area of responsibility in the MRP settings of
your user.

In the Manage PIRs screen, click in the line of material T-FSP1##.

Define the following planned independent requirements.

Period Draft PIRs

Actual week 0

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 18

 Exercise 3: Create Planned Independent Requirements, Run MRP, and Convert a Planned Order

Period Draft PIRs

Actual week +1 week 0

Actual week + 2 weeks 30

Actual week + 3 weeks 30

Actual week + 4 weeks 30

Actual week + 5 weeks 30

Actual week + 6 weeks 30

Actual week + 7 weeks 30

Actual week + 8 weeks 30

Actual week + 9 weeks 30

Actual week + 10 weeks 30

Choose Save Draft, then choose Release PIRs.

Choose Home to close the app.

Task 2: Run MRP

As a MRP controller, you start an MRP run for your finished material T-FSP1##.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage — Net Segments tile to
check the stock availability for the materials for MRP controller P##.
In the Monitor Material Coverage Screen, select your product T-FSP1## and the
components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
Then choose Manage Materials to check the Stock/Requirements Lists for the selected
materials.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.

2. In the Monitor Material Coverage – Net Segments app, display the Stock/Requirements
List for product T-FSP1## and choose Start MRP Run.
Check the result of the MRP run in the Stock/Requirements Lists for your product T-
FSP1## and the components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.

Task 3: Convert a Planned Order

As an MRP controller, you convert the next planned order into a production order and analyze
the production order from an MRP point of view.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage – Net Segments tile to
check the stock availability for the materials for MRP controller P##.
In the Monitor Material Coverage Screen, select your product T-FSP1## and the
components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
Then choose Manage Materials to check the Stock/Requirements Lists for the selected
materials.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 19

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

Select the Stock/Requirements List for your product T-FSP1## and click on the first
planned order.
Select the dropdown button under Actions, then select Convert.
In the Change Planned Order window, select Convert to Production Order and choose OK
to start the conversion.
Check the result of the planned order conversion in the Stock/Requirements Lists for your
product T-FSP1## and the components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Production Orders (MRP View) tile to
analyze the production orders for MRP controller P##.
In the Monitor Production Orders screen, check the information on the production order
for your product T-FSP1##.
Select the production order and choose Manage Orders.
In the Manage Orders Screen, you get detail information on the production order from an
MRP point of view.
Check the information on the following detail views: Stock/Requirements List,
Components, Milestones, Material, Production Order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 20

 Unit 1
Solution 3
Create Planned Independent Requirements,
Run MRP, and Convert a Planned Order

Business Scenario
Based on sales forecasts, a planner specifies requirements for the make-to-stock (MTS)
production of the bicycles. An MRP controller schedules an MRP run, checks the result, and
converts planned orders to production orders.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create Planned Independent Requirements

As a planner, you create planned independent requirements for the finished product T-
FSP1## Bike Special.
Previously, you set up a preferred planning strategy for MTS production in the material
master.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Material tile to set up the MTS planning
strategy 40 Planning with final assembly for your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
Enter the material number in the initial screen, then choose view MRP 3 for plant 1010.
In the MRP 3 view, assign strategy group 40 Planning with final assembly.
Save the material and choose Exit to leave the material master maintenance.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage PIRs tile to create planned independent
requirements for your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
When you start an MRP app for the first time, you must specify a combination of plant and
MRP controller.
Choose Plant 1010 / MRP Controller P##.

Note:
In the app, you can change the area of responsibility in the MRP settings of
your user.

In the Manage PIRs screen, click in the line of material T-FSP1##.

Define the following planned independent requirements.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 21

Unit 1: Introduction to Production Orders

Period Draft PIRs

Actual week 0

Actual week +1 week 0

Actual week + 2 weeks 30

Actual week + 3 weeks 30

Actual week + 4 weeks 30

Actual week + 5 weeks 30

Actual week + 6 weeks 30

Actual week + 7 weeks 30

Actual week + 8 weeks 30

Actual week + 9 weeks 30

Actual week + 10 weeks 30

Choose Save Draft, then choose Release PIRs.

Choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Run MRP

As a MRP controller, you start an MRP run for your finished material T-FSP1##.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage — Net Segments tile to
check the stock availability for the materials for MRP controller P##.
In the Monitor Material Coverage Screen, select your product T-FSP1## and the
components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
Then choose Manage Materials to check the Stock/Requirements Lists for the selected
materials.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.
a) You should find the following current situation:

● Product T-FSP1##: PIRs, no stock

● Components: no requirements, stock: 2000 PC

2. In the Monitor Material Coverage – Net Segments app, display the Stock/Requirements
List for product T-FSP1## and choose Start MRP Run.
Check the result of the MRP run in the Stock/Requirements Lists for your product T-
FSP1## and the components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.
a) You should find the following current situation:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 22

 Solution 3: Create Planned Independent Requirements, Run MRP, and Convert a Planned Order

● Product T-FSP1##: PIRs, Planned Orders, no stock

● Components: Dependent Requirements, stock: 2000 PC

Task 3: Convert a Planned Order

As an MRP controller, you convert the next planned order into a production order and analyze
the production order from an MRP point of view.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage – Net Segments tile to
check the stock availability for the materials for MRP controller P##.
In the Monitor Material Coverage Screen, select your product T-FSP1## and the
components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
Then choose Manage Materials to check the Stock/Requirements Lists for the selected
materials.
Select the Stock/Requirements List for your product T-FSP1## and click on the first
planned order.
Select the dropdown button under Actions, then select Convert.
In the Change Planned Order window, select Convert to Production Order and choose OK
to start the conversion.
Check the result of the planned order conversion in the Stock/Requirements Lists for your
product T-FSP1## and the components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and T-RSP1##.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.
a) You should find the following current situation:

● Product T-FSP1##: PIRs, Production Order, Planned Orders, no stock

● Components: Reservation, Dependent Requirements, stock: 2000 PC

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Production Orders (MRP View) tile to
analyze the production orders for MRP controller P##.
In the Monitor Production Orders screen, check the information on the production order
for your product T-FSP1##.
Select the production order and choose Manage Orders.
In the Manage Orders Screen, you get detail information on the production order from an
MRP point of view.
Check the information on the following detail views: Stock/Requirements List,
Components, Milestones, Material, Production Order.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 23

 Unit 2
Exercise 4
Execute a Production Order

Business Scenario
A production supervisor controls the further execution of the production orders. The
production orders will be released and printed. The next steps in order processing are goods
issue postings, confirmations, and goods receipt postings.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Release a Production Order

As a production supervisor, you release the production order for the finished product T-
FSP## Bike Special and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to analyze the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
When you start the app for the first time, you must specify as an area of responsibility a
combination of plant and production supervisor or work center.
Choose Production Supervisor for the area of responsibility and add Plant 1010 /
Production Supervisor P##.

Note:
In the app, you can change the area of responsibility in the app settings of your
user.

In the Mange Production Orders Screen, check the information on the production order for
your product T-FSP1##.
Note the actual status:
Status

>

2. Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.
Check the following detail information on the order: Issues, Order Information,
Components, Order Schedule, Confirmation, Inspection.
Have the quantities of the components already been committed by a material availability
check?
Note the actual status of the operations:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 24

 Exercise 4: Execute a Production Order

Status

>

3. Stay in the detail view of the order and choose Release.

Note the actual status of the order and of the operations:

Status

>

Have the quantities of the components been committed now?

4. Choose Edit Order to open the production order in change mode.

In the Header screen, choose the i icon to display the status in detail.
Has the order been printed?

5. Exit the production order and close the tab.

In the Mange Production Order tab, choose Back to navigate back to the Launchpad.

Task 2: Post Goods Issues

For the production order of your finished product T-FSP1##, you post the goods issues in the
picking list and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Pick Components for Production Orders tile to
pick the components for the production order of material T-FSP1## and to post the goods
issues.
A new tab with the title Picking List: Initial Screen will be opened. In the initial screen of the
Picking List, enter the following data.
Field Value

Profile 000002

Production Supervisor P##

Choose Execute.
In the Order Information System: Detail List of Components screen, select all components
for your production order, and choose Picking.
In the Picking List, select all components and choose Post to post the goods issues.
Refresh the list.
Finally close the tab.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to analyze the
material components of your production order.
Click in the line of the production order and check the detail information on the
components:
Have the required quantities of the components been consumed by goods issue postings?
What are the open quantities for the components?

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 25

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage – Net Segments tile to
check the stock/requirements situation for the components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and
T-RSP1##.
In the Monitor Material Coverage Screen, select the components.
Then choose Mange Materials to check the Stock/Requirements Lists for the
components.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.

Task 3: Confirm Operations

For the production order of your finished product T-FSP1##, you confirm the operations and
analyze the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to analyze and
confirm the operations of your production order.
Click in the line of the production order and choose Order Schedule to display the
operations.
Click in the line of the first operation to open the Manage Production Operations view and
choose Confirm Operation.
A new tab with the title Enter Time Ticket for Production Order will be opened. Check the
confirmation data and Save the confirmation.
Exit the Enter Time Ticket for Production Order screen and close the tab.
Refresh the Manage Production Operations view and check the updated information for
the first operation.
Check the operation progress and note the actual status of the operation:

Status

>

2. Confirm the other operations of the order in the same way.

Finally, navigate Back from the Manage Production Operations view to the Manage
Production Orders view and check the status of the entire order.

Status

>

Task 4: Post Goods Receipt

For the production order of your finished product T-FSP1##, you post the goods receipt and
check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stock of
your product T-FSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-FSP1##.
Describe the current situation.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to get the number
of your production order:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 26

 Exercise 4: Execute a Production Order

Order

>

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Post Goods Movements tile to post the goods
receipt for your production order.
A new tab will be opened. Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your
production order.
Set the OK flag, Check and Post the goods receipt.
Finally close the tab.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to check the status
of your production order:
Status

>

5. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stock of
your product T-FSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-FSP1##.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.

6. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to analyze the stock
of your product T-FSP1##.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 27

 Unit 2
Solution 4
Execute a Production Order

Business Scenario
A production supervisor controls the further execution of the production orders. The
production orders will be released and printed. The next steps in order processing are goods
issue postings, confirmations, and goods receipt postings.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Release a Production Order

As a production supervisor, you release the production order for the finished product T-
FSP## Bike Special and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to analyze the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
When you start the app for the first time, you must specify as an area of responsibility a
combination of plant and production supervisor or work center.
Choose Production Supervisor for the area of responsibility and add Plant 1010 /
Production Supervisor P##.

Note:
In the app, you can change the area of responsibility in the app settings of your
user.

In the Mange Production Orders Screen, check the information on the production order for
your product T-FSP1##.
Note the actual status:
Status

>

a) You should find the following status:

Status

Created

2. Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 28

 Solution 4: Execute a Production Order

Check the following detail information on the order: Issues, Order Information,
Components, Order Schedule, Confirmation, Inspection.
Have the quantities of the components already been committed by a material availability
check?
Note the actual status of the operations:

Status

>

a) The quantities of the material components haven’t been committed yet (red bar).
You should find the following operation status:
Status

Created

3. Stay in the detail view of the order and choose Release.

Note the actual status of the order and of the operations:

Status

>

Have the quantities of the components been committed now?

a) You should find the following order and operation status:
Status

Released

b) The quantities of the material components have been committed now (green bar).

4. Choose Edit Order to open the production order in change mode.

In the Header screen, choose the i icon to display the status in detail.
Has the order been printed?
a) The order has been printed. The status PRT Printed is set.

5. Exit the production order and close the tab.

In the Mange Production Order tab, choose Back to navigate back to the Launchpad.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Post Goods Issues

For the production order of your finished product T-FSP1##, you post the goods issues in the
picking list and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Pick Components for Production Orders tile to
pick the components for the production order of material T-FSP1## and to post the goods
issues.
A new tab with the title Picking List: Initial Screen will be opened. In the initial screen of the
Picking List, enter the following data.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 29

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

Field Value

Profile 000002

Production Supervisor P##

Choose Execute.
In the Order Information System: Detail List of Components screen, select all components
for your production order, and choose Picking.
In the Picking List, select all components and choose Post to post the goods issues.
Refresh the list.
Finally close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to analyze the
material components of your production order.
Click in the line of the production order and check the detail information on the
components:
Have the required quantities of the components been consumed by goods issue postings?
What are the open quantities for the components?
a) Click on the bars in column Coverage. The quantities of the material components have
been consumed.

b) The open quantities are 0.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage – Net Segments tile to
check the stock/requirements situation for the components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##, and
T-RSP1##.
In the Monitor Material Coverage Screen, select the components.
Then choose Mange Materials to check the Stock/Requirements Lists for the
components.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.
a) You should find the following current situation for the components:
The order reservations are no longer relevant for MRP and are no longer visible in the
stock/requirements list.
The stocks were reduced by the quantities withdrawn.

Task 3: Confirm Operations

For the production order of your finished product T-FSP1##, you confirm the operations and
analyze the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to analyze and
confirm the operations of your production order.
Click in the line of the production order and choose Order Schedule to display the
operations.
Click in the line of the first operation to open the Manage Production Operations view and
choose Confirm Operation.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 30

 Solution 4: Execute a Production Order

A new tab with the title Enter Time Ticket for Production Order will be opened. Check the
confirmation data and Save the confirmation.
Exit the Enter Time Ticket for Production Order screen and close the tab.
Refresh the Manage Production Operations view and check the updated information for
the first operation.
Check the operation progress and note the actual status of the operation:

Status

>

a) You should find the following situation:

The updated operation progress indicates that the total operation quantity has been
confirmed.
The operation status should be:

Status

Confirmed

2. Confirm the other operations of the order in the same way.

Finally, navigate Back from the Manage Production Operations view to the Manage
Production Orders view and check the status of the entire order.

Status

>

a) When all operations have been confirmed, the order status should be as follows:
Status

Confirmed

Task 4: Post Goods Receipt

For the production order of your finished product T-FSP1##, you post the goods receipt and
check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stock of
your product T-FSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-FSP1##.
Describe the current situation.
a) There should be no stock for the material.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to get the number
of your production order:
Order

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 31

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

a) Note the order number.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Post Goods Movements tile to post the goods
receipt for your production order.
A new tab will be opened. Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your
production order.
Set the OK flag, Check and Post the goods receipt.
Finally close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to check the status
of your production order:
Status

>

a) The order status should be as follows:

Status

Delivered

5. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stock of
your product T-FSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-FSP1##.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.
a) You should find the following current situation for your product:
The stock of storage location 101A in plant 1010 was increased by the goods receipt
quantity.

6. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to analyze the stock
of your product T-FSP1##.
Analyze and interpret the current situation.
a) You should find the following current situation for your product:
The production order is no longer relevant for MRP and is no longer visible in the
stock/requirements list.
The stock was increased by the goods receipt quantity.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 32

 Unit 2
Exercise 5
Analyze the Production Order Structure

Business Scenario
As a production supervisor, you often must check and change the data of production orders.
In special cases, you must even be able to create production orders without master data.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Display and Change a Production Order

As a production supervisor, you must be able to display and change the data of production
orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to check the stock/
requirements situation for your product T-FSP1##.
Convert the next planned order into a production order.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for production supervisor P##.
Select the new production order with status Created and choose Edit Order to open the
production order in change mode.
A new tab with the title Production Order Change: Header will be opened.

3. In the Production order Change: Header screen, try to get an overview of the data on the
following views:

● General

● Assignment

● Goods Receipt

● Dates/Qties

● Control

● Master Data

● Administration

In the Assignment view, note the number of the reservation which was created for goods
issue posting in materials management.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 33

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

Reservation

>

In the Master Data view, double-click the routing and the BOM to display the master data.

4. In the Production order Change: Header screen, choose the Status icon (i) to check the
actual status of the production order.
Note the first status.
Status Text

>

In the Change Status screen, choose the Business process view to check the allowed or
forbidden transactions.
Are goods movements allowed for the actual status?

5. Navigate back to the Production order Change: Header screen and choose Documents or
More → Header → Documents and note the documents linked to the production order.
Document

>

>

6. Navigate back to the Production order Change: Header screen and choose
More → Goto → Costs → Analysis to get an overview of the planned and actual costs.
Which transactions are included in the calculation?

Transaction

>

>

>

7. Exit the cost analysis. In the Production order Change: Header screen, choose
More → Header → Settlement Rule.
Note the settlement receiver of the production order.

Cat Settlement Receiver

>

8. Exit the settlement rule. Choose Operations to display the Operation Overview.
In the Operation Overview, check the actual status of the operations. Double-click the
status of an operation and note:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 34

 Exercise 5: Analyze the Production Order Structure

Status Text

>

Check the business processes.

Are confirmations allowed?

9. Exit the status view. In the Operation Overview, select all operations and double-click the
first operation.
For each operation, check the data on the following views:

● StandardVals

● Interop. Times

● Dates/Times

● Qties/Activities

● Cap. Rqmt Assignment

10. Navigate Back to the operation overview. Check the assignment of PRTs and trigger points
as defined in the routing.

11. Choose Components to display the Component Overview.

In the Component Overview, select all components and double-click the item number of
the first component.
Check the General Data for each component.
Check the actual status of the components.

Status Text

>

Are quantities already committed by availability check?

Are quantities already withdrawn by goods issues?

12. Navigate to the operation overview.

Choose the Insert operation (+) icon to insert the following operation:

Op. Work Center Control Key Operation short text

0025 T-BK5## YBP1 Painting

Double-click the new operation number and maintain the following standard values:

Field Std Value

Setup 15 MIN

Machine 5 MIN

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 35

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

Field Std Value

Labor 5 MIN

13. Navigate to the component overview.

Add another material component:

Item Component Reqmt Qty

0040 T-SSP3## 3

In the Allocation Operation/Sequence dialog box, allocate the new component to

operation 0025.
Finally Save the order and close the production order tab.

Task 2: Create a Production Order without Master Data

As a production supervisor, in special cases you must even be able to create production
orders without master data.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Versions tile to check whether
a production version of the prototype material T-SPROT## already exists.
In the Manage Production Version app, enter plant 1010 and the material number and
choose Enter to find production versions of the material.
Do production versions exist?

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for material T-SPROT##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SPROT##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 10

End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter, to create the order.

You get the message No valid production version found for material T-
SPROT##.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 36

 Exercise 5: Analyze the Production Order Structure

Choose Generate Operation in the Routing selection T-SPROT## dialog box and confirm
the subsequent information message with Continue.

3. Choose Operations to navigate to the operations overview.

Define the following operations:

Op. Work Center Control Key Operation short text

0010 T-BK4## PT01 Welding

0020 T-BK5## YBP3 Painting

Define the following standard values and interoperation times for operation 0010:

Field Value

Setup 15 MIN

Machine 20 MIN

Labor 20 MIN

Minimum Wait Time 1H

Standard Queue Time 1D

Minimum Queue Time 2H

Standard Move Time 2H

Minimum Move Time 1H

Define the following standard values and interoperation times for operation 0020:

Field Value

Setup 15 MIN

Machine 10 MIN

Labor 10 MIN

Minimum Wait Time 4H

Standard Queue Time 2H

Minimum Queue Time 1H

Standard Move Time 2H

Minimum Move Time 1H

4. In the operation overview, choose Components to navigate to the component overview.

Define the following components:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 37

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

Item Component Reqmt Qty Item Category Operation

0010 T-RSP5## 10 PC L 0010

0020 T-RSP6## 10 PC L 0010

0030 T-SSP3## 1L L 0020

5. Navigate to the operation overview, select operation 0010, and choose the PRT button to
assign a PRT.
In the Production Order Create: PRT New Entries box, choose Other and enter the following
data:

Field Value

PRT T-PRT200

Quantity 1 PC

Control Key 1

Standard Text Key

Text field Welding Tool Set

Choose the icon Adopt & Back to navigate to the PRT overview.
Finally, navigate Back to the operation overview.

6. Choose Sequences to navigate to the sequence overview.

Define the following parallel sequence:

Seq SeqCat Branch Op. Return Op. Short Text

1 Parallel 0010 0020 Quality Control

Select the new sequence and choose Operations to navigate to the operation overview of
the parallel sequence.
Define the following operation:

Op. Work Center Control Key Operation short text

0010 T-BKQM PT01 Quality Control

Define the following standard values for the operation.

Field Value

Setup 10 MIN

Machine 10 MIN

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 38

 Exercise 5: Analyze the Production Order Structure

Field Value

Labor 10 MIN

7. Choose Documents to navigate to the Documents Links screen.

Link the following document:

Sequence Activity Type Document

1 0010 DRW T-DSP200

Finally, Save the Order and close the Production Order Create tab.

8. Display the production order for material T-SPROT## in the Manage Production Orders
app.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 39

 Unit 2
Solution 5
Analyze the Production Order Structure

Business Scenario
As a production supervisor, you often must check and change the data of production orders.
In special cases, you must even be able to create production orders without master data.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Display and Change a Production Order

As a production supervisor, you must be able to display and change the data of production
orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to check the stock/
requirements situation for your product T-FSP1##.
Convert the next planned order into a production order.
a) Click on the next planned order.
Click on the dropdown button next to Edit and select Convert.
In the Change Planned Order window, select Convert to Production Order and choose
OK to start the conversion.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for production supervisor P##.
Select the new production order with status Created and choose Edit Order to open the
production order in change mode.
A new tab with the title Production Order Change: Header will be opened.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the Production order Change: Header screen, try to get an overview of the data on the
following views:

● General

● Assignment

● Goods Receipt

● Dates/Qties

● Control

● Master Data

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 40

 Solution 5: Analyze the Production Order Structure

● Administration

In the Assignment view, note the number of the reservation which was created for goods
issue posting in materials management.

Reservation

>

In the Master Data view, double-click the routing and the BOM to display the master data.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. In the Production order Change: Header screen, choose the Status icon (i) to check the
actual status of the production order.
Note the first status.
Status Text

>

In the Change Status screen, choose the Business process view to check the allowed or
forbidden transactions.
Are goods movements allowed for the actual status?
a) You should find the following first status.
Status Text

CRTD Created

b) Goods movements are not allowed for status CRTD.

5. Navigate back to the Production order Change: Header screen and choose Documents or
More → Header → Documents and note the documents linked to the production order.
Document

>

>

a) The documents assigned to the material master and defined as components in the
BOM are linked to the order (see master data exercises).
Document

T-DSP100

T-DSP200

6. Navigate back to the Production order Change: Header screen and choose
More → Goto → Costs → Analysis to get an overview of the planned and actual costs.
Which transactions are included in the calculation?

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 41

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

Transaction

>

>

>

a) The following transactions are included.

Transaction

Goods issues

Confirmations

Goods Receipt

7. Exit the cost analysis. In the Production order Change: Header screen, choose
More → Header → Settlement Rule.
Note the settlement receiver of the production order.

Cat Settlement Receiver

>

a) The following settlement receiver is assigned.

Cat Settlement Receiver

MAT T-FSP1##

8. Exit the settlement rule. Choose Operations to display the Operation Overview.
In the Operation Overview, check the actual status of the operations. Double-click the
status of an operation and note:

Status Text

>

Check the business processes.

Are confirmations allowed?
a) You should find the following status for the operations.

Status Text

CRTD Created

b) Confirmations are not allowed for status CRTD.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 42

 Solution 5: Analyze the Production Order Structure

9. Exit the status view. In the Operation Overview, select all operations and double-click the
first operation.
For each operation, check the data on the following views:

● StandardVals

● Interop. Times

● Dates/Times

● Qties/Activities

● Cap. Rqmt Assignment

a) You can navigate from operation to operation using Previous Operation or Next
Operation.

10. Navigate Back to the operation overview. Check the assignment of PRTs and trigger points
as defined in the routing.
a) In the operation overview, the PRT indicator is set for operation 0020 and the TP
(trigger point) indicator is set for operation 0030. Double-click the indicators or
choose the corresponding buttons to display these objects.

11. Choose Components to display the Component Overview.

In the Component Overview, select all components and double-click the item number of
the first component.
Check the General Data for each component.
Check the actual status of the components.

Status Text

>

Are quantities already committed by availability check?

Are quantities already withdrawn by goods issues?
a) You should find the following status for the components:
Status Text

CRTD Created

b) No quantities are committed or withdrawn.

12. Navigate to the operation overview.

Choose the Insert operation (+) icon to insert the following operation:

Op. Work Center Control Key Operation short text

0025 T-BK5## YBP1 Painting

Double-click the new operation number and maintain the following standard values:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 43

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

Field Std Value

Setup 15 MIN

Machine 5 MIN

Labor 5 MIN

a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

13. Navigate to the component overview.

Add another material component:

Item Component Reqmt Qty

0040 T-SSP3## 3

In the Allocation Operation/Sequence dialog box, allocate the new component to

operation 0025.
Finally Save the order and close the production order tab.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

Task 2: Create a Production Order without Master Data

As a production supervisor, in special cases you must even be able to create production
orders without master data.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Versions tile to check whether
a production version of the prototype material T-SPROT## already exists.
In the Manage Production Version app, enter plant 1010 and the material number and
choose Enter to find production versions of the material.
Do production versions exist?
a) There are no production versions for the material yet.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for material T-SPROT##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SPROT##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 44

 Solution 5: Analyze the Production Order Structure

Field Value

Total Qty 10

End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter, to create the order.

You get the message No valid production version found for material T-
SPROT##.
Choose Generate Operation in the Routing selection T-SPROT## dialog box and confirm
the subsequent information message with Continue.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Choose Operations to navigate to the operations overview.

Define the following operations:

Op. Work Center Control Key Operation short text

0010 T-BK4## PT01 Welding

0020 T-BK5## YBP3 Painting

Define the following standard values and interoperation times for operation 0010:

Field Value

Setup 15 MIN

Machine 20 MIN

Labor 20 MIN

Minimum Wait Time 1H

Standard Queue Time 1D

Minimum Queue Time 2H

Standard Move Time 2H

Minimum Move Time 1H

Define the following standard values and interoperation times for operation 0020:

Field Value

Setup 15 MIN

Machine 10 MIN

Labor 10 MIN

Minimum Wait Time 4H

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 45

Unit 2: Order Processing and Order Structure

Field Value

Standard Queue Time 2H

Minimum Queue Time 1H

Standard Move Time 2H

Minimum Move Time 1H

a) First define the operations in the operation overview. Then select both operations and
double-click the first operation. Enter the standard values and the interoperation times
on the corresponding tabs. Use Next Operation to navigate the second operation.
Finally navigate Back to the operation overview.

4. In the operation overview, choose Components to navigate to the component overview.

Define the following components:

Item Component Reqmt Qty Item Category Operation

0010 T-RSP5## 10 PC L 0010

0020 T-RSP6## 10 PC L 0010

0030 T-SSP3## 1L L 0020

a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

5. Navigate to the operation overview, select operation 0010, and choose the PRT button to
assign a PRT.
In the Production Order Create: PRT New Entries box, choose Other and enter the following
data:

Field Value

PRT T-PRT200

Quantity 1 PC

Control Key 1

Standard Text Key

Text field Welding Tool Set

Choose the icon Adopt & Back to navigate to the PRT overview.
Finally, navigate Back to the operation overview.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

6. Choose Sequences to navigate to the sequence overview.

Define the following parallel sequence:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 46

 Solution 5: Analyze the Production Order Structure

Seq SeqCat Branch Op. Return Op. Short Text

1 Parallel 0010 0020 Quality Control

Select the new sequence and choose Operations to navigate to the operation overview of
the parallel sequence.
Define the following operation:

Op. Work Center Control Key Operation short text

0010 T-BKQM PT01 Quality Control

Define the following standard values for the operation.

Field Value

Setup 10 MIN

Machine 10 MIN

Labor 10 MIN

a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

7. Choose Documents to navigate to the Documents Links screen.

Link the following document:

Sequence Activity Type Document

1 0010 DRW T-DSP200

Finally, Save the Order and close the Production Order Create tab.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

8. Display the production order for material T-SPROT## in the Manage Production Orders
app.
a) Execute the Manage Production Orders tile.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 47

 Unit 3
Exercise 6
Create Production Orders by Planned Order
Conversion

Business Scenario
Usually, a collective conversion is used to convert planned orders into production orders.
However, an MRP controller must also be able to convert planned orders individually or
partially.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create Production Orders by Individual or Partial Conversion

As an MRP controller, you must be able to convert planned orders individually or partially into
production orders. There are various apps and transactions available for this purpose.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to display
the planned orders for your product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue to open the stock/requirements list.

Double-click the next planned order.
In the Additional Data for MRP Element dialog box, choose -> Prod. Ord. (Convert Planned
Order to Production Order).
Save the new production order and Refresh the stock/requirements list.
Analyze and interpret the result.

2. Double-click the next planned order.

In the Additional Data for MRP Element dialog box, choose -> PartConvProdOrder (Convert
Planned Order to Production Order (Partial Quantity)).
In the Query Subset/Order Correction screen, enter the following value:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 48

 Exercise 6: Create Production Orders by Planned Order Conversion

Field Value

Target Quantity 15 PC

Choose Generate and Save to create a production order with the entered target quantity.
Navigate Back to the stock/requirements list and Refresh the list.
Analyze and interpret the result.

3. Perform a second partial conversion for the planned order.

In the Query Subset/Order Correction screen, enter the current total quantity as the target
quantity.
Choose Generate.
The following information is displayed: Indicator ‘Delete planned order’ is set. Choose
Continue to confirm the information.
Choose Save to create a second production order for the planned order.
Navigate Back to the stock/requirements list and Refresh the list.
Analyze and interpret the result.

4. Write down the number of the next planned order:

>

Don’t exit the Stock/Requirements List tab.

In the first tab Home of the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Converting Planned Order to
Production Order tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Planned Order Number of the planned order

Partial conversion

Order Type YBM1

Note:
In this transaction, the order type can be entered. This is not possible in the
stock/requirements list, where a default order type is used.
If you set the Partial conversion indicator, you also can carry out a partial
conversion.

Choose Enter to convert the planned order into a production order.

Save the new production order and Close the tab.
In Stock/Requirements List tab, Refresh the list.
Analyze and interpret the result.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 49

Unit 3: Order Creation

Task 2: Create Productions Orders by Collective Conversion

Usually, a collective conversion is used to convert planned orders into production orders.
There are various apps and transactions available for this purpose.

1. If you have closed the stock/requirements list in the meantime, open it again in the known
manner:
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to display
the planned orders for your product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue to open the stock/requirements list.

Double-click the next but one planned order.
In the Additional Data for MRP Element dialog box, the opening date of the planned order is
displayed. Write down the date.

>

Then close the dialog box again.

2. In the first tab Home of the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Convert Planned Orders to
Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Planning Plant 1010

MRP Controller P##

Opening Date (from) Today

Opening Date (to) Opening date of next but one planned order

Order Type YBM1

Choose Run Selection.

The next two planned orders should be displayed in the list of the orders to be converted.
Select both planned orders and choose Convert.
Finally, Close the tab.

3. In the Stock/Requirements List tab, Refresh the list.

Analyze and interpret the result.

4. In the first tab Home of the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production
Orders tile.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 50

 Exercise 6: Create Production Orders by Planned Order Conversion

A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders

Planned Orders x

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Planning Plant 1010

MRP Controller P##

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Convert Planned Order

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Convert Planned Order selected

Choose Execute.
Select the first planned order and press the Convert Planned Order icon.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The line of the converted planned order has been
disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.

5. In the Stock/Requirements List tab, Refresh the list.

Analyze and interpret the result.

6. In the first tab Home of the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Schedule Order Conversion
Runs tile to schedule a planned order conversion run.
In the Application Jobs screen, choose New.
In the New Job screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Job Template Convert Planned Order at Opening Date

Job Name P## Planned Order Conversion

Start Immediately X

Planning Plant 1010

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 51

Unit 3: Order Creation

Field Value

MRP Controller P##

Relative Opening Date Delete all conditions

Order Type Production Orders YBM1

Order Type for Process Orders YBM2

Choose Schedule to start the conversion run.

In the Application Jobs screen, choose Go to refresh the screen. Wait until your job has
been finished.
Finally choose Home to close the app.

7. In Stock/Requirements List tab, Refresh the list.

Analyze and interpret the result.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 52

 Unit 3
Solution 6
Create Production Orders by Planned Order
Conversion

Business Scenario
Usually, a collective conversion is used to convert planned orders into production orders.
However, an MRP controller must also be able to convert planned orders individually or
partially.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create Production Orders by Individual or Partial Conversion

As an MRP controller, you must be able to convert planned orders individually or partially into
production orders. There are various apps and transactions available for this purpose.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to display
the planned orders for your product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue to open the stock/requirements list.

Double-click the next planned order.
In the Additional Data for MRP Element dialog box, choose -> Prod. Ord. (Convert Planned
Order to Production Order).
Save the new production order and Refresh the stock/requirements list.
Analyze and interpret the result.
a) In the stock/requirements list, the planned order has been deleted and replaced by a
production order.

2. Double-click the next planned order.

In the Additional Data for MRP Element dialog box, choose -> PartConvProdOrder (Convert
Planned Order to Production Order (Partial Quantity)).
In the Query Subset/Order Correction screen, enter the following value:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 53

Unit 3: Order Creation

Field Value

Target Quantity 15 PC

Choose Generate and Save to create a production order with the entered target quantity.
Navigate Back to the stock/requirements list and Refresh the list.
Analyze and interpret the result.
a) The stock/requirements list displays the new production order with the target
quantity. The planned order has been reduced by this quantity.

3. Perform a second partial conversion for the planned order.

In the Query Subset/Order Correction screen, enter the current total quantity as the target
quantity.
Choose Generate.
The following information is displayed: Indicator ‘Delete planned order’ is set. Choose
Continue to confirm the information.
Choose Save to create a second production order for the planned order.
Navigate Back to the stock/requirements list and Refresh the list.
Analyze and interpret the result.
a) The stock/requirements list displays a second production order with the target
quantity of the second conversion. The planned order has been deleted.

4. Write down the number of the next planned order:

>

Don’t exit the Stock/Requirements List tab.

In the first tab Home of the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Converting Planned Order to
Production Order tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Planned Order Number of the planned order

Partial conversion

Order Type YBM1

Note:
In this transaction, the order type can be entered. This is not possible in the
stock/requirements list, where a default order type is used.
If you set the Partial conversion indicator, you also can carry out a partial
conversion.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 54

 Solution 6: Create Production Orders by Planned Order Conversion

Choose Enter to convert the planned order into a production order.

Save the new production order and Close the tab.
In Stock/Requirements List tab, Refresh the list.
Analyze and interpret the result.
a) In the stock/requirements list, the planned order has been deleted and replaced by the
new production order.

Task 2: Create Productions Orders by Collective Conversion

Usually, a collective conversion is used to convert planned orders into production orders.
There are various apps and transactions available for this purpose.

1. If you have closed the stock/requirements list in the meantime, open it again in the known
manner:
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to display
the planned orders for your product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue to open the stock/requirements list.

Double-click the next but one planned order.
In the Additional Data for MRP Element dialog box, the opening date of the planned order is
displayed. Write down the date.

>

Then close the dialog box again.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise

2. In the first tab Home of the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Convert Planned Orders to
Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Planning Plant 1010

MRP Controller P##

Opening Date (from) Today

Opening Date (to) Opening date of next but one planned order

Order Type YBM1

Choose Run Selection.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 55

Unit 3: Order Creation

The next two planned orders should be displayed in the list of the orders to be converted.
Select both planned orders and choose Convert.
Finally, Close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the Stock/Requirements List tab, Refresh the list.

Analyze and interpret the result.
a) The next two planned orders have been converted to production orders.

4. In the first tab Home of the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production
Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders

Planned Orders x

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Planning Plant 1010

MRP Controller P##

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Convert Planned Order

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Convert Planned Order selected

Choose Execute.
Select the first planned order and press the Convert Planned Order icon.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The line of the converted planned order has been
disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. In the Stock/Requirements List tab, Refresh the list.

Analyze and interpret the result.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 56

 Solution 6: Create Production Orders by Planned Order Conversion

a) The next planned order has been converted.

6. In the first tab Home of the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Schedule Order Conversion
Runs tile to schedule a planned order conversion run.
In the Application Jobs screen, choose New.
In the New Job screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Job Template Convert Planned Order at Opening Date

Job Name P## Planned Order Conversion

Start Immediately X

Planning Plant 1010

MRP Controller P##

Relative Opening Date Delete all conditions

Order Type Production Orders YBM1

Order Type for Process Orders YBM2

Choose Schedule to start the conversion run.

In the Application Jobs screen, choose Go to refresh the screen. Wait until your job has
been finished.
Finally choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

7. In Stock/Requirements List tab, Refresh the list.

Analyze and interpret the result.
a) All remaining planned orders have been converted.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 57

 Unit 3
Exercise 7
Create a Production Order with Material and
Copy a Production Order

Business Scenario
As an MRP controller or production supervisor, in certain situations you need to be able to
create production orders quickly and flexibly. A corresponding app or transaction is available
for this purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Production Order with Material

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for your finished product T-FSP1##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 5

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to create the order.

Save the order and write down the order number:

>

Close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 58

 Exercise 7: Create a Production Order with Material and Copy a Production Order

Task 2: Copy a Production Order

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order as a copy of another production order.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Copy from / Order Order no. from the previous task

Choose Continue. The total quantity is copied from the reference order and could be
changed. You still have to enter the end date in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Basic Dates / End Choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to create the order as a copy of the reference order.

Save the order and close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 59

 Unit 3
Solution 7
Create a Production Order with Material and
Copy a Production Order

Business Scenario
As an MRP controller or production supervisor, in certain situations you need to be able to
create production orders quickly and flexibly. A corresponding app or transaction is available
for this purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Production Order with Material

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for your finished product T-FSP1##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 5

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to create the order.

Save the order and write down the order number:

>

Close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 60

 Solution 7: Create a Production Order with Material and Copy a Production Order

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise. When you save the order, the order
number is displayed in a message at the bottom of the screen.

Task 2: Copy a Production Order

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order as a copy of another production order.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Copy from / Order Order no. from the previous task

Choose Continue. The total quantity is copied from the reference order and could be
changed. You still have to enter the end date in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Basic Dates / End Choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to create the order as a copy of the reference order.

Save the order and close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 61

 Unit 3
Exercise 8
Create a Production Order without Material

Business Scenario
As an MRP controller or production supervisor, in certain situations you must be able to
create production orders without material.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Production Order Without Material

You need to set up a production line. The necessary activities lead to costs and have to be
confirmed. Furthermore, the activities must be scheduled and capacity requirements must be
determined for the work centers concerned. Finally, cleaning materials and lubricants are to
be provided by reservations.
You can realize these requirements with a production order without material.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create order without material tile to create a
production order without material.

A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

MRP Controller P##

Prodn Supervisor P##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Material Description Set up production line T-RM100

Total Qty 1 PC

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 62

 Exercise 8: Create a Production Order without Material

Choose Enter.
In the Routing selection dialog box, choose Ref. Operation Set.
In the Enter Reference Operation Set dialog box, enter the following group:

Field Value

Group SETUP

Choose Continue.
In the Maintain Settlement Rule: Overview screen, enter the following data:

Cat Settlement Receiver %

CTR 10101301 100

Navigate Back to the order header screen. Choose Continue to confirm an information
message about the master data transfer.
Choose Operations to navigate to the operation overview. An operation was copied from
the reference operation set.
Choose Components to navigate to the component overview. Enter the following
components:

Item. Component Reqmt Qty Item Category Operation

0010 T-RCL 100 L 0010

0020 T-RLU 100 L 0010

Save the order and Close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 63

 Unit 3
Solution 8
Create a Production Order without Material

Business Scenario
As an MRP controller or production supervisor, in certain situations you must be able to
create production orders without material.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Production Order Without Material

You need to set up a production line. The necessary activities lead to costs and have to be
confirmed. Furthermore, the activities must be scheduled and capacity requirements must be
determined for the work centers concerned. Finally, cleaning materials and lubricants are to
be provided by reservations.
You can realize these requirements with a production order without material.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create order without material tile to create a
production order without material.

A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

MRP Controller P##

Prodn Supervisor P##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Material Description Set up production line T-RM100

Total Qty 1 PC

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 64

 Solution 8: Create a Production Order without Material

Choose Enter.
In the Routing selection dialog box, choose Ref. Operation Set.
In the Enter Reference Operation Set dialog box, enter the following group:

Field Value

Group SETUP

Choose Continue.
In the Maintain Settlement Rule: Overview screen, enter the following data:

Cat Settlement Receiver %

CTR 10101301 100

Navigate Back to the order header screen. Choose Continue to confirm an information
message about the master data transfer.
Choose Operations to navigate to the operation overview. An operation was copied from
the reference operation set.
Choose Components to navigate to the component overview. Enter the following
components:

Item. Component Reqmt Qty Item Category Operation

0010 T-RCL 100 L 0010

0020 T-RLU 100 L 0010

Save the order and Close the tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 65

 Unit 3
Exercise 9
Create Production Orders for Sales Orders

Business Scenario
While the production requirements are created as planned independent requirements in a
make-to-stock (MTS) planning strategy, the requirements are created as sales orders in a
make-to-order (MTO) strategy. In MTO production, the subsequent functions of MRP and
planned order conversion run in principle as in MTS production. The difference is that each
sales order is managed separately in an individual segment, independent of other customer or
independent requirements. MRP is carried out separately for each individual segment. The
goods receipt from production is transferred to a separate customer stock for each sales
order.
Although the use of MRP and the subsequent planned order conversion are typical, in special
cases an MRP controller must also be able to create production orders directly for sales
orders.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Sales Order

As an internal sales representative, you create a sales order for your finished product T-
FSP1## Bike Special and analyze the result.
Previously, you set up a planning strategy for MTO production in the material master.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Material tile to set up the MTO planning
strategy 20 Make-to-order production for your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
A new tab with the title Change Material will be opened. Enter the material number in the
initial screen, then choose view MRP 3 for plant 1010.
In the MRP 3 view, assign strategy group 20 Make-to-order production.
Save the material and close the tab.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Sales Orders tile to create a sales order
for your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
In the Manage Sales Orders screen, choose Create Sales Order.
A new tab will be opened. In the Create Sales Document screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Order Type OR

Sales Organization 1010

Distribution Channel 10

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 66

 Exercise 9: Create Production Orders for Sales Orders

Field Value

Division 00

Choose Continue. In the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Sold-To Party 10100001

Cust. Reference GR##

Req. Deliv. Date Today + 2 weeks

Choose the Item Overview and enter the following data.

Item Material Order Quantity

10 T-FSP1## 10

Confirm your entries with Enter, Save your sales order, and close the tab.
On the Manage Sales Orders screen, choose Go to refresh and display your sales order in
the list. Write down the sales order number:

Sales Order

>

Finally choose Home to close the app.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage (Net / Individual Seg
…) tile to check the material coverage of the materials for MRP controller P##.
In the Monitor Material Coverage – Net and Individual Segments screen, you should find
the following situation:
Regarding your sales order, there is an individual segment for your finished product T-
FSP1##. Note the corresponding shortage in the following table:

Material No. Individual Segment Shortage Quantity

T-FSP1##

Choose Manage Materials to get more detailed information for the individual segment in
the Stock/Requirements List. Note the actual situation in the following table:

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 67

Unit 3: Order Creation

Note:
In the Stock/Requirements List, you can open the sales order, start an MRP
run, or open the Stock/Requirements List (MD04).

Task 2: Create Production Orders for the Sales Order

In special cases, an MRP controller must also be able to create production orders directly for
sales orders.
It is also possible to create production orders for materials that are not defined as items in the
sales order.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Production order with sales order tile to create a
production order directly for your sales order.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Sales Order Sales order no. / item no.

Choose Continue to create the production order.

The production order quantity, the production order dates and the production plant are
determined form the sales order.
Confirm the suggested data with Enter. The order will be scheduled.
Note the information about the sales order in the production order header data.
Save the production order and Close the tab.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage (Net / Individual Seg
…) tile to check the changed material coverage situation.
You should find the following situation:
There are now two individual segments, one for your product T-FSP1## and another for
the material component T-SSP1##.

Hint:
You can sort the list ascending or descending by individual segments. Choose
the Sort Table symbol and make the corresponding settings.

Note the actual situation for the individual segments in the following table:

Material No. Individual Segment Shortage Quantity

T-FSP1##

T-SSP1##

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 68

 Exercise 9: Create Production Orders for Sales Orders

Select the two lines with the individual segments and choose Manage Materials to get
more detailed information in the Stock/Requirements List. Note the actual situation in the
following table:
T-FSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

>

>

T-SSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

>

Why is material component T-SSP1## also managed and planned in an individual

segment for your sales order, but not the other components T-SSP2## and T-RSP1##?
To answer this question, check the settings for the Individual/coll field in the MRP 4 view
of the materials.
Why is there no shortage regarding the individual segment of material T-FSP1##, but a
shortage quantity regarding the individual segment of material T-SSP1##?

Hint:
You can also execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile or the
Monitor Order Progress tile in the SAP Fiori Launchpad to analyze the current
situation and to display the individual segments.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Production order with sales order tile to create a
production order to cover the reservation of semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Sales Order Sales order no. / item no.

Material T-SSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Choose Continue. You get the following Information:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 69

Unit 3: Order Creation

Material no. T-FSP1## of sales order not same as material number entered.
In the Production order Create: Header screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Total Qty. 10.

Basic Dates / End Required date of reservation

Choose Enter to create the order.

Finally, Save the production order and Close the tab.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage (Net / Individual Seg
…) tile to check the changed material coverage situation.
You should find the following situation:
There is no shortage regarding the individual segments of the material T-FSP1## and T-
SSP1##.
Note the actual situation for the individual segments in the following table:

Material No. Individual Segment Shortage Quantity

T-FSP1##

T-SSP1##

Select the two lines with the individual segments and choose Manage Materials to get
more detailed information in the Stock/Requirements List. Note the actual situation in the
following table:
T-FSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

>

>

T-SSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

>

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 70

 Exercise 9: Create Production Orders for Sales Orders

Hint:
You can also execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile or the
Monitor Order Progress tile in the SAP Fiori Launchpad to analyze the current
situation and to display the individual segments.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 71

 Unit 3
Solution 9
Create Production Orders for Sales Orders

Business Scenario
While the production requirements are created as planned independent requirements in a
make-to-stock (MTS) planning strategy, the requirements are created as sales orders in a
make-to-order (MTO) strategy. In MTO production, the subsequent functions of MRP and
planned order conversion run in principle as in MTS production. The difference is that each
sales order is managed separately in an individual segment, independent of other customer or
independent requirements. MRP is carried out separately for each individual segment. The
goods receipt from production is transferred to a separate customer stock for each sales
order.
Although the use of MRP and the subsequent planned order conversion are typical, in special
cases an MRP controller must also be able to create production orders directly for sales
orders.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Sales Order

As an internal sales representative, you create a sales order for your finished product T-
FSP1## Bike Special and analyze the result.
Previously, you set up a planning strategy for MTO production in the material master.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Material tile to set up the MTO planning
strategy 20 Make-to-order production for your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
A new tab with the title Change Material will be opened. Enter the material number in the
initial screen, then choose view MRP 3 for plant 1010.
In the MRP 3 view, assign strategy group 20 Make-to-order production.
Save the material and close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Sales Orders tile to create a sales order
for your finished product T-FSP1## Bike Special.
In the Manage Sales Orders screen, choose Create Sales Order.
A new tab will be opened. In the Create Sales Document screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Order Type OR

Sales Organization 1010

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 72

 Solution 9: Create Production Orders for Sales Orders

Field Value

Distribution Channel 10

Division 00

Choose Continue. In the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Sold-To Party 10100001

Cust. Reference GR##

Req. Deliv. Date Today + 2 weeks

Choose the Item Overview and enter the following data.

Item Material Order Quantity

10 T-FSP1## 10

Confirm your entries with Enter, Save your sales order, and close the tab.
On the Manage Sales Orders screen, choose Go to refresh and display your sales order in
the list. Write down the sales order number:

Sales Order

>

Finally choose Home to close the app.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage (Net / Individual Seg
…) tile to check the material coverage of the materials for MRP controller P##.
In the Monitor Material Coverage – Net and Individual Segments screen, you should find
the following situation:
Regarding your sales order, there is an individual segment for your finished product T-
FSP1##. Note the corresponding shortage in the following table:

Material No. Individual Segment Shortage Quantity

T-FSP1##

Choose Manage Materials to get more detailed information for the individual segment in
the Stock/Requirements List. Note the actual situation in the following table:

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 73

Unit 3: Order Creation

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

Note:
In the Stock/Requirements List, you can open the sales order, start an MRP
run, or open the Stock/Requirements List (MD04).

a) In the Monitor Material Coverage – Net and Individual Segments screen, you should
find the following situation.
Material No. Individual Segment Shortage Quantity

T-FSP1## CustSt Sales order no. 10 PC

b) In the Stock/Requirements List, you should find the following situation.

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

Today CustSt 0 0

Req. Date CusOrd Sales order no. 10 -10

Task 2: Create Production Orders for the Sales Order

In special cases, an MRP controller must also be able to create production orders directly for
sales orders.
It is also possible to create production orders for materials that are not defined as items in the
sales order.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Production order with sales order tile to create a
production order directly for your sales order.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Sales Order Sales order no. / item no.

Choose Continue to create the production order.

The production order quantity, the production order dates and the production plant are
determined form the sales order.
Confirm the suggested data with Enter. The order will be scheduled.
Note the information about the sales order in the production order header data.
Save the production order and Close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 74

 Solution 9: Create Production Orders for Sales Orders

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage (Net / Individual Seg
…) tile to check the changed material coverage situation.
You should find the following situation:
There are now two individual segments, one for your product T-FSP1## and another for
the material component T-SSP1##.

Hint:
You can sort the list ascending or descending by individual segments. Choose
the Sort Table symbol and make the corresponding settings.

Note the actual situation for the individual segments in the following table:

Material No. Individual Segment Shortage Quantity

T-FSP1##

T-SSP1##

Select the two lines with the individual segments and choose Manage Materials to get
more detailed information in the Stock/Requirements List. Note the actual situation in the
following table:
T-FSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

>

>

T-SSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

>

Why is material component T-SSP1## also managed and planned in an individual

segment for your sales order, but not the other components T-SSP2## and T-RSP1##?
To answer this question, check the settings for the Individual/coll field in the MRP 4 view
of the materials.
Why is there no shortage regarding the individual segment of material T-FSP1##, but a
shortage quantity regarding the individual segment of material T-SSP1##?

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 75

Unit 3: Order Creation

Hint:
You can also execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile or the
Monitor Order Progress tile in the SAP Fiori Launchpad to analyze the current
situation and to display the individual segments.

a) In the Monitor Material Coverage – Net and Individual Segments screen, you should
find the following situation.
Material No. Individual Segment Shortage Quantity

T-FSP1## CustSt Sales order no. 0

T-SSP1## CustSt Sales order no. 10 PC

b) In the Stock/Requirements List, you should find the following situation.

T-FSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

Today CustSt 0 0

Available Date PrdOrd Prod. order no. 10 10

Required Date CustOrd Sales order no. 10 0

T-SSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

Today CustSt 0 0

Required Date OrderRes Res. No. 10 10-

The semi-finished material T-SSP1## is also managed and planned in an individual

segment for your sales order. This is due to the setting ‘_’ for the Individual/coll field in
the MRP 4 view of the material master. The components T-SSP2## and T-RSP1## are
set as collective requirements and are not managed in individual segments.
The reason for the shortage is the reservation of the material component T-SSP1##
for the production order of the finished product T-FSP1##. As the semi-finished
material T-SSP1## is also managed in an individual segment for your sales order, the
reservation quantity has to be produced for the customer stock and cannot be
withdrawn from the collective stock.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Production order with sales order tile to create a
production order to cover the reservation of semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 76

 Solution 9: Create Production Orders for Sales Orders

Field Value

Sales Order Sales order no. / item no.

Material T-SSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Choose Continue. You get the following Information:

Material no. T-FSP1## of sales order not same as material number entered.
In the Production order Create: Header screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Total Qty. 10.

Basic Dates / End Required date of reservation

Choose Enter to create the order.

Finally, Save the production order and Close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Material Coverage (Net / Individual Seg
…) tile to check the changed material coverage situation.
You should find the following situation:
There is no shortage regarding the individual segments of the material T-FSP1## and T-
SSP1##.
Note the actual situation for the individual segments in the following table:

Material No. Individual Segment Shortage Quantity

T-FSP1##

T-SSP1##

Select the two lines with the individual segments and choose Manage Materials to get
more detailed information in the Stock/Requirements List. Note the actual situation in the
following table:
T-FSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 77

Unit 3: Order Creation

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

T-SSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

>

>

>

Hint:
You can also execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile or the
Monitor Order Progress tile in the SAP Fiori Launchpad to analyze the current
situation and to display the individual segments.

a) In the Monitor Material Coverage – Net and Individual Segments screen, you should
find the following situation.
Material No. Individual Segment Shortage Quantity

T-FSP1## CustSt Sales order no. 0

T-SSP1## CustSt Sales order no. 0

b) In the Stock/Requirements List, you should find the following situation.

T-FSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

Today CustSt 0 0

Available Date PrdOrd Prod. order no. 10 10

Required Date CusOrd Sales order no. 10 0

T-SSP1##

Date MRP Element Quantity (PC) Available (PC)

Today CustSt 0 0

Available Date PrdOrd Prod. order no. 10 10

Required Date OrderRes Res. No. 10 0

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 78

 Unit 3
Exercise 10
Define an Order Type

Business Scenario
A production order is always created with reference to an order type. The order type controls
the business processes of an order. As a member of the project team for implementing
production orders, you must be able to create and maintain order types. You do this in the
Customizing environment of the backend system.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Define an Order Type

In a first step for the implementation of production orders, you must create an order type.

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, create order type PO## along
with the description GR## Production Order as a copy of order type YBM1.
Choose transaction SPRO and choose the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define Order Types.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Overview screen, select the line of order type
YBM1 and choose Copy As.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Details screen, overwrite order type YBM1 and the
short text of the order type with:

Order Type Short Text

PO## GR## Production Order

Press Enter to copy the settings. Finally Save your order type. Confirm an information
message about the number ranges.

Task 2: Define Order-Type-Dependent Parameters

In a second Customizing step, you must define order-type-dependent parameters for your
production plants.

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, create the order-type-dependent

parameters for your order type PO## in plant 1010 by copying the settings for order type
YBM1.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define Order-Type-
Dependent Parameters.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 79

Unit 3: Order Creation

In the Order Type-Dependent Parameters Overview, select the line of order type YBM1 and
plant 1010 choose Copy As.
Overwrite order type YBM1 with your order type:

Order Type

PO##

Press Enter to copy the settings. Remove the values from fields Residence Time 1 and
Residence Time 2. Finally Save your order-type-dependent parameters.

Task 3: Create a Production Order with your Order Type

Now you want to test your new order type. You do this in the backend system.

1. Choose transaction CO01 to create a production order. Enter the following data in the
initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Enter and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 5

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to create the order.

Save the production order.

Note:
We will define further Customizing parameters for the order type in the
following exercises.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 80

 Unit 3
Solution 10
Define an Order Type

Business Scenario
A production order is always created with reference to an order type. The order type controls
the business processes of an order. As a member of the project team for implementing
production orders, you must be able to create and maintain order types. You do this in the
Customizing environment of the backend system.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Define an Order Type

In a first step for the implementation of production orders, you must create an order type.

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, create order type PO## along
with the description GR## Production Order as a copy of order type YBM1.
Choose transaction SPRO and choose the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define Order Types.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Overview screen, select the line of order type
YBM1 and choose Copy As.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Details screen, overwrite order type YBM1 and the
short text of the order type with:

Order Type Short Text

PO## GR## Production Order

Press Enter to copy the settings. Finally Save your order type. Confirm an information
message about the number ranges.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Define Order-Type-Dependent Parameters

In a second Customizing step, you must define order-type-dependent parameters for your
production plants.

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, create the order-type-dependent

parameters for your order type PO## in plant 1010 by copying the settings for order type
YBM1.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 81

Unit 3: Order Creation

Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define Order-Type-

Dependent Parameters.
In the Order Type-Dependent Parameters Overview, select the line of order type YBM1 and
plant 1010 choose Copy As.
Overwrite order type YBM1 with your order type:

Order Type

PO##

Press Enter to copy the settings. Remove the values from fields Residence Time 1 and
Residence Time 2. Finally Save your order-type-dependent parameters.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 3: Create a Production Order with your Order Type

Now you want to test your new order type. You do this in the backend system.

1. Choose transaction CO01 to create a production order. Enter the following data in the
initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Enter and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 5

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to create the order.

Save the production order.

Note:
We will define further Customizing parameters for the order type in the
following exercises.

a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 82

 Unit 3
Exercise 11
Analyze Master Data Selection

Business Scenario
The selection of the master data for planned orders and production orders is made by the
selection of production versions. An MRP controller or production supervisor needs to
understand how to automatically select production versions and how to make a manual
selection in certain situations.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Maintain Production Versions

As a production engineer, you must be able to maintain production versions.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Versions C223 tile to change
the production versions of material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Version: Mass Processing will be opened.
Enter the following data:

Field Value

Plant 1010

Material T-SSP2##

Choose Continue or Enter.

Two production versions will be displayed.
Select both production versions and choose the Detail view icon.
Make the following changes to the production versions in the detail screens:
Production version 0001

Field Value

Minimum Lot Size 1

Maximum Lot Size 5

Choose the Next Production Version icon to move to the second production version.
Production version 0002

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 83

Unit 3: Order Creation

Field Value

Minimum Lot Size 6

Maximum Lot Size 10

Choose the Save Changes and Close Screen icon to close the detail screens.
In the Production Version: Mass Processing screen, choose Consistency Check. A log will
be displayed. Exit the log and Save the production versions.
Close the tab.

Task 2: Check the Automatic Selection of Production Versions

You check the automatic selection of the production versions of material T-SSP2##.

Note:
The results of this task are also valid for planned orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 3

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to schedule the order.

In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

Field Value

Prodn Version

You don’t need to save the order. Close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 84

 Exercise 11: Analyze Master Data Selection

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create another
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 7

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to schedule the order.

In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

Field Value

Prodn Version

You don’t need to save the order. Close the tab.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Versions C223 tile to change
the production versions of material T-SSP2## again.
A new tab with the title Production Version: Mass Processing will be opened.
Enter the following data:

Field Value

Plant 1010

Material T-SSP2##

Choose Continue or Enter.

Select both production versions and choose the Detail view icon.
Make the following changes to the production versions in the detail screens:
Production version 0001

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 85

Unit 3: Order Creation

Field Value

Minimum Lot Size 1

Maximum Lot Size 1000

Choose the Next Production Version icon to move to the second production version.
Production version 0002

Field Value

Minimum Lot Size 1

Maximum Lot Size 1000

Choose the Save Changes and Close Screen icon to close the detail screens.
In the Production Version: Mass Processing screen, choose Consistency Check. A log will
be displayed. Exit the log and Save the production versions.
Close the tab.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create another
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Note:
Please use order type YBM1 for this exercise. The order is to be released later.
This is not yet possible for your order type PO## because the Customizing
settings for the availability check are still missing.

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 7

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to schedule the order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 86

 Exercise 11: Analyze Master Data Selection

In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

Field Value

Prodn Version

Interpret the result.

Save the order and write down the order number:

>

Close the tab.

Task 3: Check the Manual Selection of Production Versions

Now you check various ways to manually select a production version.

1. If you want to change the production version after the order has been created, you can use
function Read PP Master Data.

Note:
You can also use the Read PP Master Data function if the master data has
changed and you want to update the production order.

Note:
You can also change the production version for a planned order. In this case,
no special function is required. The master data is updated automatically when
you save the planned order.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Production Order tile to change the
production order from the previous task.
A new tab with the title Production Order Change: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the production order number from the previous task:

Field Value

Order Prod. order no. from previous task

Choose More → Functions → Read PP Master Data.

In the Read PP master data dialog box, choose the input help (F4) for the field Production
Version.
In the Select Production Version for Material dialog box, select production version 0002
and click the Choose button.
In the Read PP master data dialog box, choose Continue to close the box.
In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 87

Unit 3: Order Creation

Field Value

Prodn Version

2. Choose the button Release Order to release the production order.

In the Release Order dialog box, choose Release Order and ignore the non-availability of
material components at the moment.
Check the status of the order. Status REL Released should be set.
Now read the PP master data again. Choose More → Functions → Read PP Master Data.
In the Postread Master Data dialog box, choose Cont.
In the Read PP master data dialog box, choose the input help (F4) for the field Production
Version.
In the Select Production Version for Material dialog box, select production version 0001
and press the Choose button.
In the Read PP master data dialog box, choose Continue.
You get the following information message:
Status of released order is reverted to ‘Created’.
Choose Continue to close the message.
In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

Field Value

Prodn Version

Check the status of the order. Status CRTD Created should be set.

Note:
If you have already posted confirmations or goods movements, the Read PP
Master Data function can no longer be executed.

Save the order and Close the tab.

3. If you create a production order manually, you can select a production version before
scheduling.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create another
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 88

 Exercise 11: Analyze Master Data Selection

Field Value

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 7

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Don’t choose Enter. Choose Production Versions.

In the Select Production Version for Material dialog box, you can now select a production
version.
You don’t need to save the order. Close the tab.

4. You can set in the order-type dependent parameters that a production version is to be
selected manually when you create an order manually.
In the Customizing environment of the backend system, change the order-type-
dependent parameters for your order type PO## in plant 1010.
In the backend system, choose transaction SPRO and press the SAP Reference IMG
button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define Order-Type-
Dependent Parameters.
In the Order Type-Dependent Parameters Overview, select the line of your order type
PO## and plant 1010 choose the Details icon.
Change the following setting:

Production Version

1 Manual selection of production version

Save your order-type-dependent parameters.

5. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create another
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 89

Unit 3: Order Creation

Field Value

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 7

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter.
The Select Production Version for Material dialog box is displayed automatically. You can
now select a production version.

Note:
If only one production version is valid, this production version is automatically
selected.

You don’t need to save the order. Close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 90

 Unit 3
Solution 11
Analyze Master Data Selection

Business Scenario
The selection of the master data for planned orders and production orders is made by the
selection of production versions. An MRP controller or production supervisor needs to
understand how to automatically select production versions and how to make a manual
selection in certain situations.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Maintain Production Versions

As a production engineer, you must be able to maintain production versions.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Versions C223 tile to change
the production versions of material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Version: Mass Processing will be opened.
Enter the following data:

Field Value

Plant 1010

Material T-SSP2##

Choose Continue or Enter.

Two production versions will be displayed.
Select both production versions and choose the Detail view icon.
Make the following changes to the production versions in the detail screens:
Production version 0001

Field Value

Minimum Lot Size 1

Maximum Lot Size 5

Choose the Next Production Version icon to move to the second production version.
Production version 0002

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 91

Unit 3: Order Creation

Field Value

Minimum Lot Size 6

Maximum Lot Size 10

Choose the Save Changes and Close Screen icon to close the detail screens.
In the Production Version: Mass Processing screen, choose Consistency Check. A log will
be displayed. Exit the log and Save the production versions.
Close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Check the Automatic Selection of Production Versions

You check the automatic selection of the production versions of material T-SSP2##.

Note:
The results of this task are also valid for planned orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 3

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to schedule the order.

In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

Field Value

Prodn Version

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 92

 Solution 11: Analyze Master Data Selection

You don’t need to save the order. Close the tab.

a) For order quantity 3, the following production version has been selected:
Field Value

Prodn Version 0001

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create another
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 7

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to schedule the order.

In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

Field Value

Prodn Version

You don’t need to save the order. Close the tab.

a) For order quantity 7, the following production version has been selected:
Field Value

Prodn Version 0002

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Versions C223 tile to change
the production versions of material T-SSP2## again.
A new tab with the title Production Version: Mass Processing will be opened.
Enter the following data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 93

Unit 3: Order Creation

Field Value

Plant 1010

Material T-SSP2##

Choose Continue or Enter.

Select both production versions and choose the Detail view icon.
Make the following changes to the production versions in the detail screens:
Production version 0001

Field Value

Minimum Lot Size 1

Maximum Lot Size 1000

Choose the Next Production Version icon to move to the second production version.
Production version 0002

Field Value

Minimum Lot Size 1

Maximum Lot Size 1000

Choose the Save Changes and Close Screen icon to close the detail screens.
In the Production Version: Mass Processing screen, choose Consistency Check. A log will
be displayed. Exit the log and Save the production versions.
Close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create another
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 94

 Solution 11: Analyze Master Data Selection

Note:
Please use order type YBM1 for this exercise. The order is to be released later.
This is not yet possible for your order type PO## because the Customizing
settings for the availability check are still missing.

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 7

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to schedule the order.

In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

Field Value

Prodn Version

Interpret the result.

Save the order and write down the order number:

>

Close the tab.

a) For order quantity 7, now production version 0001 has been selected:
Field Value

Prodn Version 0001

If several production versions are valid, the alphanumeric first version will be selected.
When you save the order, the order number is displayed in a message at the bottom of
the screen.

Task 3: Check the Manual Selection of Production Versions

Now you check various ways to manually select a production version.

1. If you want to change the production version after the order has been created, you can use
function Read PP Master Data.

Note:
You can also use the Read PP Master Data function if the master data has
changed and you want to update the production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 95

Unit 3: Order Creation

Note:
You can also change the production version for a planned order. In this case,
no special function is required. The master data is updated automatically when
you save the planned order.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Production Order tile to change the
production order from the previous task.
A new tab with the title Production Order Change: Initial Screen will be opened.
In the initial screen, enter the production order number from the previous task:

Field Value

Order Prod. order no. from previous task

Choose More → Functions → Read PP Master Data.

In the Read PP master data dialog box, choose the input help (F4) for the field Production
Version.
In the Select Production Version for Material dialog box, select production version 0002
and click the Choose button.
In the Read PP master data dialog box, choose Continue to close the box.
In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

Field Value

Prodn Version

a) The following production version is assigned:

Field Value

Prodn Version 0002

2. Choose the button Release Order to release the production order.

In the Release Order dialog box, choose Release Order and ignore the non-availability of
material components at the moment.
Check the status of the order. Status REL Released should be set.
Now read the PP master data again. Choose More → Functions → Read PP Master Data.
In the Postread Master Data dialog box, choose Cont.
In the Read PP master data dialog box, choose the input help (F4) for the field Production
Version.
In the Select Production Version for Material dialog box, select production version 0001
and press the Choose button.
In the Read PP master data dialog box, choose Continue.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 96

 Solution 11: Analyze Master Data Selection

You get the following information message:

Status of released order is reverted to ‘Created’.
Choose Continue to close the message.
In the Production order Create: Header screen, choose the Master Data tab and note the
number of the production version:

Field Value

Prodn Version

Check the status of the order. Status CRTD Created should be set.

Note:
If you have already posted confirmations or goods movements, the Read PP
Master Data function can no longer be executed.

Save the order and Close the tab.

a) The following production version is assigned:
Field Value

Prodn Version 0001

3. If you create a production order manually, you can select a production version before
scheduling.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create another
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 7

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Don’t choose Enter. Choose Production Versions.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 97

Unit 3: Order Creation

In the Select Production Version for Material dialog box, you can now select a production
version.
You don’t need to save the order. Close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. You can set in the order-type dependent parameters that a production version is to be
selected manually when you create an order manually.
In the Customizing environment of the backend system, change the order-type-
dependent parameters for your order type PO## in plant 1010.
In the backend system, choose transaction SPRO and press the SAP Reference IMG
button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define Order-Type-
Dependent Parameters.
In the Order Type-Dependent Parameters Overview, select the line of your order type
PO## and plant 1010 choose the Details icon.
Change the following setting:

Production Version

1 Manual selection of production version

Save your order-type-dependent parameters.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create another
production order for material T-SSP2##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-SSP2##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:

Field Value

Total Qty 7

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 98

 Solution 11: Analyze Master Data Selection

The Select Production Version for Material dialog box is displayed automatically. You can
now select a production version.

Note:
If only one production version is valid, this production version is automatically
selected.

You don’t need to save the order. Close the tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 99

 Unit 3
Exercise 12
Set Up and Analyze Scheduling

Business Scenario
In Customizing, you define scheduling parameters for your order type and a scheduling
margin key for your product.
You then test different scenarios for production order scheduling.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Define Scheduling Parameters

In the Customizing environment of the backend system, define scheduling parameters for
your order type PO## in plant 1010.

1. Choose transaction SPRO and click the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Scheduling → Define Scheduling
Parameters for Production Orders.
At the current situation, scheduling for production orders with order type PO## in plant
1010 is controlled by settings related to the following key fields:

Plant Order Type PrSch

1010 * *

Define special scheduling parameters for your order type PO## by copying these setting.
In the Specify scheduling parameters: Overview screen, select the corresponding line and
choose the Copy As icon.
In the Specify scheduling parameters: Details screen, overwrite order type * with .

Order Type

PO##

Choose Enter to copy the settings.

Save your scheduling parameters.

2. Change your scheduling parameters.

In the Specify scheduling parameters: Overview screen, select the corresponding line and
choose the Details icon.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 100

 Exercise 12: Set Up and Analyze Scheduling

Change the following settings:

Field Value

Scheduling Type Forwards

Maximum Reduction Level Do not reduce beyond reduction level 3

L1 30

L2 60

L3 100

Save your scheduling parameters.

3. In the scheduling parameters, the reduction of the floats before and after production is
defined.
Also check the reduction strategy defined on operation level.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Scheduling → Define Reduction
Strategy.
In the Reduction Strategy: Overview screen, select the line for strategy 01 in plant 1010 and
choose the Reduction levels folder.
Get an overview of which time elements and functions can be used to reduce the lead
times of operations.
Note the settings in the following table:

R Red. Queue Transport Overlap Split

Note:
Reduction strategy 01 is assigned to the order-dependent parameters of your
order type PO##.

Task 2: Define a Scheduling Margin Key

In the Customizing environment of the backend system, define a scheduling margin key. Then
assign the profile to your product.

1. In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:

Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Scheduling → Define Scheduling Margin
Key.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 101

Unit 3: Order Creation

In the Margins for scheduling: Overview screen, choose New Entries and enter the following
data:

Plnt Key Opening Pe- Float After Float Before Release Pe-
riod Production Production riod

1010 T## 5 1 2 5

Save your scheduling margin key.

2. Assign your scheduling margin key T## to your product T-FSP1##.

In the backend system, choose transaction MM02.
Enter the material number T-FSP1## in the initial screen, then choose view MRP 2 for
plant 1010.
In the MRP 2 view, assign scheduling margin key T##.
Save the material.

Task 3: Schedule a Production Order

You create a production order and check the results of scheduling in various situations.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create a production order in

production plant 1010 for your product T-FSP1##. Use order type PO##.
Enter a total quantity of 1 PC.
Choose the next Monday or the first workday of the next week as the basic start date.

2. Check if the following statements are correct:

In accordance with the scheduling parameters you have defined in Customizing,
scheduling type Forwards is proposed.
According to the settings you have made in the material master record for material T-
FSP1##, scheduling margin key T## is proposed.
In accordance with the scheduling parameters, the Calculate Capacity Requirements
indicator and the Schedule Automatically indicator are set in the Control tab.

3. Check in detail the dates and times on header, operation, and component level.
For the operations, check also the calculated activities and capacity requirements.

4. Now change the basic end date to one workday closer to the present.
As a result of the change, the status NTUP Dates are not updated has been set.
Choose the Schedule Order icon.
As a result, the order has been scheduled with reduction level 1:
The float before production was reduced by one day, and according to the reduction
strategy, the queue times of the operations were reduced by 50 %.

5. Now change the basic end date to one more workday closer to the present.
Again, check the status and reschedule the order.
As a result, the order has been scheduled with reduction level 2:
The float after production was used up, the queue times were reduced by 100 %, and the
transportation times were reduced.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 102

 Exercise 12: Set Up and Analyze Scheduling

6. Again, change the basic end date to one workday closer to the present and reschedule the
order.
As a result, the order has been scheduled with reduction level 3:
The float before production was used up, and the operations overlap if overlapping is
defined in the routing.

7. Choose Order → Settings → Scheduling to display the scheduling parameters in the order.
Set the reduction strategy to Do not reduce and schedule the order again.

Note:
The changes only apply to the order and have no effect on the settings in
Customizing.

As a result, the basic end date has been adjusted according to the setting Adjust basic
dates in the scheduling parameters.

8. Now choose the scheduling type Backwards and schedule the order again.
Starting from the basic end date, the system schedules the order backward.
Check the recalculated Scheduled End and Scheduled Start of the order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 103

 Unit 3
Solution 12
Set Up and Analyze Scheduling

Business Scenario
In Customizing, you define scheduling parameters for your order type and a scheduling
margin key for your product.
You then test different scenarios for production order scheduling.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Define Scheduling Parameters

In the Customizing environment of the backend system, define scheduling parameters for
your order type PO## in plant 1010.

1. Choose transaction SPRO and click the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Scheduling → Define Scheduling
Parameters for Production Orders.
At the current situation, scheduling for production orders with order type PO## in plant
1010 is controlled by settings related to the following key fields:

Plant Order Type PrSch

1010 * *

Define special scheduling parameters for your order type PO## by copying these setting.
In the Specify scheduling parameters: Overview screen, select the corresponding line and
choose the Copy As icon.
In the Specify scheduling parameters: Details screen, overwrite order type * with .

Order Type

PO##

Choose Enter to copy the settings.

Save your scheduling parameters.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Change your scheduling parameters.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 104

 Solution 12: Set Up and Analyze Scheduling

In the Specify scheduling parameters: Overview screen, select the corresponding line and
choose the Details icon.
Change the following settings:

Field Value

Scheduling Type Forwards

Maximum Reduction Level Do not reduce beyond reduction level 3

L1 30

L2 60

L3 100

Save your scheduling parameters.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the scheduling parameters, the reduction of the floats before and after production is
defined.
Also check the reduction strategy defined on operation level.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Scheduling → Define Reduction
Strategy.
In the Reduction Strategy: Overview screen, select the line for strategy 01 in plant 1010 and
choose the Reduction levels folder.
Get an overview of which time elements and functions can be used to reduce the lead
times of operations.
Note the settings in the following table:

R Red. Queue Transport Overlap Split

Note:
Reduction strategy 01 is assigned to the order-dependent parameters of your
order type PO##.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise. The settings for the reduction strategy
are as follows:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 105

Unit 3: Order Creation

R Red. Queue Transport Overlap Split

1 50

2 100 X

3 100 X X

4 100 X X X

Task 2: Define a Scheduling Margin Key

In the Customizing environment of the backend system, define a scheduling margin key. Then
assign the profile to your product.

1. In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:

Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Scheduling → Define Scheduling Margin
Key.
In the Margins for scheduling: Overview screen, choose New Entries and enter the following
data:

Plnt Key Opening Pe- Float After Float Before Release Pe-
riod Production Production riod

1010 T## 5 1 2 5

Save your scheduling margin key.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Assign your scheduling margin key T## to your product T-FSP1##.

In the backend system, choose transaction MM02.
Enter the material number T-FSP1## in the initial screen, then choose view MRP 2 for
plant 1010.
In the MRP 2 view, assign scheduling margin key T##.
Save the material.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 3: Schedule a Production Order

You create a production order and check the results of scheduling in various situations.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create a production order in

production plant 1010 for your product T-FSP1##. Use order type PO##.
Enter a total quantity of 1 PC.
Choose the next Monday or the first workday of the next week as the basic start date.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Check if the following statements are correct:

In accordance with the scheduling parameters you have defined in Customizing,
scheduling type Forwards is proposed.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 106

 Solution 12: Set Up and Analyze Scheduling

According to the settings you have made in the material master record for material T-
FSP1##, scheduling margin key T## is proposed.
In accordance with the scheduling parameters, the Calculate Capacity Requirements
indicator and the Schedule Automatically indicator are set in the Control tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. Check in detail the dates and times on header, operation, and component level.
For the operations, check also the calculated activities and capacity requirements.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. Now change the basic end date to one workday closer to the present.
As a result of the change, the status NTUP Dates are not updated has been set.
Choose the Schedule Order icon.
As a result, the order has been scheduled with reduction level 1:
The float before production was reduced by one day, and according to the reduction
strategy, the queue times of the operations were reduced by 50 %.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. Now change the basic end date to one more workday closer to the present.
Again, check the status and reschedule the order.
As a result, the order has been scheduled with reduction level 2:
The float after production was used up, the queue times were reduced by 100 %, and the
transportation times were reduced.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

6. Again, change the basic end date to one workday closer to the present and reschedule the
order.
As a result, the order has been scheduled with reduction level 3:
The float before production was used up, and the operations overlap if overlapping is
defined in the routing.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

7. Choose Order → Settings → Scheduling to display the scheduling parameters in the order.
Set the reduction strategy to Do not reduce and schedule the order again.

Note:
The changes only apply to the order and have no effect on the settings in
Customizing.

As a result, the basic end date has been adjusted according to the setting Adjust basic
dates in the scheduling parameters.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

8. Now choose the scheduling type Backwards and schedule the order again.
Starting from the basic end date, the system schedules the order backward.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 107

Unit 3: Order Creation

Check the recalculated Scheduled End and Scheduled Start of the order.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 108

 Unit 3
Exercise 13
Analyze the Calculation of the Planned Costs

Business Scenario
The settings for costing production orders are made in Controlling. However, as a production
supervisor, you want to be able to track the calculation of the costs.

Note:
In this exercise, the american grammar is used for the decimal notation. So,
depending on the settings in your system landscape, the “decimal” setting could
be 1.234.456,89 instead of the used 1,234,456.89.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Display Prices of Materials and Activities

You analyze prices that are used for the costing of production orders.

1. You check and note the price for material component T-RSP1##.
In the backend system, choose transaction MM03.
Enter the material number T-RSP1## in the initial screen, then choose view Accounting 1
for plant 1010.
Note the price of the material:

Per. Unit price (per PC)

>

Exit the material.

2. You check and note the price for the product T-FSP1##.
In the backend system, choose transaction MM03.
Enter the material number T-FSP1## in the initial screen, then choose view Accounting 1
for plant 1010.
Note the price of the material:

Standard Price (per PC)

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 109

Unit 3: Order Creation

Exit the material.

3. For work center T-BK1## you check and note the assignment of an activity type to a
standard value.

Note:
All work centers have the same settings in our production orders for the
production of material T-FSP1##.

In the backend system, choose transaction CR03.

Enter plant 1010 and work center T-BK1## in the initial screen.
Choose the Costing tab and note the following settings:

Field Value

Controlling Area

Cost Center

Alt. Activity Text (=Standard Value) Activity type

Setup

Exit the work center.

4. You check and note the price for activity type 3 in cost center 10101301.
In the backend system, choose transaction KP26.
Set controlling area A000 and enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Version 0

From Period 1

To Period 12

Fiscal year Actual year

Cost Center 10101301

Activity Type 3

Choose the Overview Screen icon.

Note the price of the activity type:

Variable Price (per H)

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 110

 Exercise 13: Analyze the Calculation of the Planned Costs

Exit the transaction.

Task 2: Analyze the Planned Costs of a Production Order

You create a production order and analyze the planned costs.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create a production order in

production plant 1010 for your product T-FSP1##. Use order type PO##.
Enter a total quantity of 1 PC.
Choose any basic start date in the near future.
Save the production order and note the order number:

>

2. Choose transaction CO02 to change the production order.

Choose Goto → Costs → Analysis.
Note the cost analysis for the following rows:

Transaction Origin Total Plan Costs Total plan quantity

Goods Issue 1010/T-RSP1##

Confirmations 10101301/3

Goods Receipt 1010/T-FSP1##

Compare the cost analysis with the prices checked in the previous task.
Interpret the cost analysis.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 111

 Unit 3
Solution 13
Analyze the Calculation of the Planned Costs

Business Scenario
The settings for costing production orders are made in Controlling. However, as a production
supervisor, you want to be able to track the calculation of the costs.

Note:
In this exercise, the american grammar is used for the decimal notation. So,
depending on the settings in your system landscape, the “decimal” setting could
be 1.234.456,89 instead of the used 1,234,456.89.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Display Prices of Materials and Activities

You analyze prices that are used for the costing of production orders.

1. You check and note the price for material component T-RSP1##.
In the backend system, choose transaction MM03.
Enter the material number T-RSP1## in the initial screen, then choose view Accounting 1
for plant 1010.
Note the price of the material:

Per. Unit price (per PC)

>

Exit the material.

a) You should find the following price:
Per. Unit price

1.65

2. You check and note the price for the product T-FSP1##.
In the backend system, choose transaction MM03.
Enter the material number T-FSP1## in the initial screen, then choose view Accounting 1
for plant 1010.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 112

 Solution 13: Analyze the Calculation of the Planned Costs

Note the price of the material:

Standard Price (per PC)

>

Exit the material.

a) You should find the following price:
Standard Price

52.91

3. For work center T-BK1## you check and note the assignment of an activity type to a
standard value.

Note:
All work centers have the same settings in our production orders for the
production of material T-FSP1##.

In the backend system, choose transaction CR03.

Enter plant 1010 and work center T-BK1## in the initial screen.
Choose the Costing tab and note the following settings:

Field Value

Controlling Area

Cost Center

Alt. Activity Text (=Standard Value) Activity type

Setup

Exit the work center.

a) You should find the following data:
Field Value

Controlling Area A000

Cost Center 10101301

Alt. Activity Text (=Standard Value) Activity type

Setup 3

4. You check and note the price for activity type 3 in cost center 10101301.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 113

Unit 3: Order Creation

In the backend system, choose transaction KP26.

Set controlling area A000 and enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Version 0

From Period 1

To Period 12

Fiscal year Actual year

Cost Center 10101301

Activity Type 3

Choose the Overview Screen icon.

Note the price of the activity type:

Variable Price (per H)

>

Exit the transaction.

a) You should find the following price:
Variable Price

3000

Task 2: Analyze the Planned Costs of a Production Order

You create a production order and analyze the planned costs.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create a production order in

production plant 1010 for your product T-FSP1##. Use order type PO##.
Enter a total quantity of 1 PC.
Choose any basic start date in the near future.
Save the production order and note the order number:

>

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Choose transaction CO02 to change the production order.

Choose Goto → Costs → Analysis.
Note the cost analysis for the following rows:

Transaction Origin Total Plan Costs Total plan quantity

Goods Issue 1010/T-RSP1##

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 114

 Solution 13: Analyze the Calculation of the Planned Costs

Transaction Origin Total Plan Costs Total plan quantity

Confirmations 10101301/3

Goods Receipt 1010/T-FSP1##

Compare the cost analysis with the prices checked in the previous task.
Interpret the cost analysis.
a) You should find the following cost analysis for the rows under consideration:
Transaction Origin Total Plan Costs Total plan quanti-
ty

Goods Issue 1010/T-RSP1## 1.65 1

Confirmations 10101301/3 30 1

Goods Receipt 1010/T-FSP1## -52.91 1-

The system uses the prices maintained in the material master records to determine
the debits with regard to the planned goods issues quantities of material components.
For material T-RSP1## a goods issue quantity of 1 PC is planned. This corresponds to
costs of €1.65, because the price is €1.65 per PC for the material.
The system uses the prices defined for the activity types and cost centers of the work
centers to determine the debits with regard to the activities planned to be confirmed.
For activity type 3 Setup, an activity of 1 H is planned in total across all work centers of
the order. This corresponds to costs of €30, because the price is €30 per H for the
activity type.
The system uses the price maintained in the material master record of the product to
determine the credits with regard to the planned goods receipt quantity.
For material T-FSP1## a goods receipt quantity of -1 PC is planned. This corresponds
to costs of €-52,91, because the price is €52.91 per PC for the material.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 115

 Unit 4
Exercise 14
Set Up and Perform Material Availability
Checks

Business Scenario
Availability checks for material components ensure that only those orders are released for
which the required material quantity is available on the calculated requirements date.
As a member of the project team, you must be able to set up material availability checks in
Customizing.
As an MRP controller or production scheduler, you must be able to carry out material
availability checks and interpret the results. You have to be able to analyze and process
missing parts situations.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Set Up Material Availability Checks

In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, you define the checking control
settings for your order type PO## in plant 1010.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create a production order in

production plant 1010 for your product T-FSP1##. Use order type PO##.
Enter a total quantity of 10 PC.
Choose any basic start date in the near future.
Choose the Check Material Availability button.
Is a material availability check already possible?
Check the log.
You don’t need to save the order.

2. In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, define the checking controls for
your order type PO## and for the business functions 1 Check availability during order
creation and 2 Check availability during order release in plant 1010. To do so, copy the
checking controls for order type YBM1.

Choose transaction SPRO and press the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Availability Check → Define Checking
Control.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 116

 Exercise 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

In the Order Control: Overview screen, select the line for Plant 1010, Order Type YBM1, and
Business Function 1.
Choose the Copy As icon.
In the Order Control: Overview Details screen, get an overview of the checking control
settings. Note the following settings:

Field Value

No check

Material availability / Checking Rule

Overwrite order type YBM1 with

Order Type

PO##

Choose Enter to copy the settings.

3. In the Order Control: Overview screen, now select the line for Plant 1010, Order Type
YBM1, and Business Function 2.
Choose the Copy As icon.
In the Order Control: Overview Details screen, get an overview of the checking control
settings. Note the following settings:

Field Value

No check

Material availability / Checking Rule

Release material

Overwrite order type YBM1 with:

Order Type

PO##

Choose Enter to copy the settings.

Finally, Save your checking control settings.

4. All material components are assigned to checking group Y2 in our business scenarios.
Display the scopes of check for the combinations checking group Y2 / checking rule SO
and checking group Y2 / checking rule SO.
Choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Availability Check → Define Scope of
Check.

Task 2: Prepare a Test Scenario

You prepare a simple scenario to test the material availability settings.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 117

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

1. Reject your sales order.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Sales Orders tile.
In the Manage Sales Orders screen, enter your customer reference number:

Field Value

Customer Reference GR##

Choose Go to select your sales order.

Click the number of your sales order and choose Change Sales Order.
A new tab will be opened. In the Change Standard Order screen, choose tab Reason for
rejection.
Choose the following reason for rejection:

Field Value

Reason for Rejection Competitor better

Save your sales order and Close the tab

In the Manage Sales Orders screen, choose Home to close the app.

2. Set all production orders for production supervisor P## to technically complete.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

Syst. Status TECO

Excl. x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 118

 Exercise 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

Field Value

Function Technically Complete

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Technically Complete selected

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Order Headers list, select all production orders and choose
Technically Complete.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The production orders have disappeared.
Finally,Close the mass processing tab.

3. Start an MRP run for material T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to check the current
situation for material T-FSP1##.
In the Find Material dialog box, enter material number T-FSP1## and plant 1010.
In the stock/requirements list, choose Start MRP Run.
As a result, planned orders will be created.
Choose Home to close the app.

4. Convert the next three planned orders to production orders.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders

Planned Orders x

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Planning Plant 1010

MRP Controller P##

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Convert Planned Order

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 119

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Field Value

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Convert Planned Order selected

Order Type PO##

Choose Execute.
Select the next three planned orders and click the Convert Planned Order icon.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The converted planned orders have disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.

5. Check the result of the planned order conversion.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.

Hint:
In the app, you can change the area of responsibility in the app settings of
your user.

In the Mange Production Orders Screen, check the result of the planned order conversion.
Three production orders for material T-FSP1## with order quantity 30 PC should be
displayed.
Choose Home to close the app.

6. Reduce the stock of material component T-RSP1## to 80 PC.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stock of
material component T-RSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-RSP1##.
Check the stock for storage location 101B. Select this storage location and choose Manage
Stock.
In the Manage Stock screen, choose the Unrestricted-Use Stock button.
In the Manage Stock dialog box, make the following entries:

Field Value

Stock Change: Scrapping

Quantity Quantity required to reduce the stock to 80 PC

Post the goods issue.

Choose Home to close the app.

Task 3: Perform a First Material Availability Check

You carry out a first material availability check and interpret the results.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 120

 Exercise 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

1. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1##.

In the backend system, choose transaction CO09 Availability Overview.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Material T-RSP1##

Plant 1010

Checking Rule SO

Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

OrdRes

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
In the Mange Production Orders Screen, click in the first line to display the details of the
corresponding production order.
Choose Edit Order. The production order will be opened in a new tab.

3. In the production order header, choose the i (Status) icon. Has a material availability
check already been carried out when the order was created? Note the corresponding
status:
>

Why was the availability check performed or why not?

4. In the production order header, choose the Material (Check Material Availability) button.
Note the status again:

>

Save the order and Close the tab.

5. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, refresh (F5) the Manage Production Orders screen and choose
Components.
A green bar is displayed in the Coverage column. The committed quantities are displayed.
Navigate Back to the Mange Production Orders overview.
Don’t close the app.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 121

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

6. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1## again.

In the backend system, Refresh the Availability Overview.
Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

OrdRes

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

Task 4: Perform another Material Availability Check

You carry out another material availability check for the next production order and check and
interpret the results.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, in the Mange Production Orders Screen, click in second line to
display the details of the next production order.
Choose Edit Order. The production order will be opened in a new tab.

2. In the production order header, choose the Release Order button to release the order.
Has a material availability check been carried out when the order was released? Note the
corresponding status:

>

Why was the availability check performed or why not?

Save the order and Close the tab.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, navigate Back to the Mange Production Orders overview.
Don’t close the app.

4. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1## again.

In the backend system, Refresh the Availability Overview.
Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

OrdRes

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 122

 Exercise 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

Task 5: Perform another Material Availability Check and Analyze Missing Parts
You carry out another material availability check for the last production order. You must
analyze and process a missing parts situation.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, in the Mange Production Orders Screen, click in third line to
display the details of the last production order.
Choose Edit Order. The production order will be opened in a new tab.

2. In the production order header, choose the Material (Check Material Availability) button.
The Availability Check dialog box and the following message is displayed:
Non-Availability of Material for order / Further Processing.
Choose the Missing Parts List button and note the information in the list in the following
table:

Material Requirement quantity Conf./Allocated qty.

>

Note the corresponding status:

>

Choose the Release Order button.

The Release Order dialog box is displayed. You could choose the Release Order button to
release the order.
Why is it possible to release the order?
Save the order and Close the tab.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, refresh (F5) the Mange Production Orders screen and choose
Issues.
The following issue is displayed: Component Missing: T-RSP1##.
Choose Components.
For material component T-RSP1##, the bar in the Coverage column is partly green and
partly red. The committed quantities and the missing quantities are displayed.
Navigate Back to the Mange Production Orders overview.
The Component Issue is displayed for the corresponding production order.
Don’t close the app.

4. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1## again.

In the backend system, Refresh the Availability Overview.
Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 123

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

OrdRes

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

5. Analyze the material shortage in the missing parts information system.

Don’t close the availability overview. Choose New GUI Window.
In the new window, choose transaction CO24.
In the initial screen of the missing parts information system, enter plant 1010 and material
T-RSP1##.
Choose Execute and check the information displayed in the list.
Finally, Exit the information system.

6. Check how material availability checks can be performed in mass processing.

In the second window, choose the corresponding transaction COHV.
Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Syst. Status TECO

Excl. x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Material Availability Check

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Material Availability Check selected

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 124

 Exercise 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

Field Value

Reset Availability Data x

Scope of Process ATP check for all materials

Choose Execute.
The Mass Processing – Order Headers list displays the three orders for which you have
performed material availability checks.
The first order has the status MSPT, the other orders have the status MACM.
Select all orders and choose the Material Availability Check icon.
Choose List → Refresh.
Now the last order has the status MSPT, the other orders have the status MACM.
According to the mass processing settings, the availability checks for all orders were
initially reset and then an availability check was carried out again. The orders were
processed one after the other according to their sorting.
Finally, Exit mass processing.

7. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1## again.

In the first window, Refresh the Availability Overview.
Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

OrdRes

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

8. You can also reset the availability data in an individual order.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, in the Mange Production Orders screen, display the details of a
production order and edit the order.
In the production order, choose More → Functions → Availability Check → Reset Material.
Note the corresponding status:

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 125

 Unit 4
Solution 14
Set Up and Perform Material Availability
Checks

Business Scenario
Availability checks for material components ensure that only those orders are released for
which the required material quantity is available on the calculated requirements date.
As a member of the project team, you must be able to set up material availability checks in
Customizing.
As an MRP controller or production scheduler, you must be able to carry out material
availability checks and interpret the results. You have to be able to analyze and process
missing parts situations.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Set Up Material Availability Checks

In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, you define the checking control
settings for your order type PO## in plant 1010.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create a production order in

production plant 1010 for your product T-FSP1##. Use order type PO##.
Enter a total quantity of 10 PC.
Choose any basic start date in the near future.
Choose the Check Material Availability button.
Is a material availability check already possible?
Check the log.
You don’t need to save the order.
a) A material availability check isn’t possible yet.
In the Availability Check dialog box, the following message is displayed: Incorrect
Check.
Choose Log and display the corresponding error message: Order type PO##, plant
1010: Checking rule missing.

2. In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, define the checking controls for
your order type PO## and for the business functions 1 Check availability during order
creation and 2 Check availability during order release in plant 1010. To do so, copy the
checking controls for order type YBM1.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 126

 Solution 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

Choose transaction SPRO and press the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Availability Check → Define Checking
Control.
In the Order Control: Overview screen, select the line for Plant 1010, Order Type YBM1, and
Business Function 1.
Choose the Copy As icon.
In the Order Control: Overview Details screen, get an overview of the checking control
settings. Note the following settings:

Field Value

No check

Material availability / Checking Rule

Overwrite order type YBM1 with

Order Type

PO##

Choose Enter to copy the settings.

a) The settings are as follows:
Field Value

No check x

Material availability / Checking Rule SO

3. In the Order Control: Overview screen, now select the line for Plant 1010, Order Type
YBM1, and Business Function 2.
Choose the Copy As icon.
In the Order Control: Overview Details screen, get an overview of the checking control
settings. Note the following settings:

Field Value

No check

Material availability / Checking Rule

Release material

Overwrite order type YBM1 with:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 127

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Order Type

PO##

Choose Enter to copy the settings.

Finally, Save your checking control settings.
a) The settings are as follows:
Field Value

No check

Material availability / Checking Rule SP

Release material 1 User decides on release if parts are missing

4. All material components are assigned to checking group Y2 in our business scenarios.
Display the scopes of check for the combinations checking group Y2 / checking rule SO
and checking group Y2 / checking rule SO.
Choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Availability Check → Define Scope of
Check.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Prepare a Test Scenario

You prepare a simple scenario to test the material availability settings.

1. Reject your sales order.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Sales Orders tile.
In the Manage Sales Orders screen, enter your customer reference number:

Field Value

Customer Reference GR##

Choose Go to select your sales order.

Click the number of your sales order and choose Change Sales Order.
A new tab will be opened. In the Change Standard Order screen, choose tab Reason for
rejection.
Choose the following reason for rejection:

Field Value

Reason for Rejection Competitor better

Save your sales order and Close the tab

In the Manage Sales Orders screen, choose Home to close the app.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 128

 Solution 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Set all production orders for production supervisor P## to technically complete.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

Syst. Status TECO

Excl. x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Technically Complete

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Technically Complete selected

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Order Headers list, select all production orders and choose
Technically Complete.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The production orders have disappeared.
Finally,Close the mass processing tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. Start an MRP run for material T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to check the current
situation for material T-FSP1##.
In the Find Material dialog box, enter material number T-FSP1## and plant 1010.
In the stock/requirements list, choose Start MRP Run.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 129

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

As a result, planned orders will be created.

Choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. Convert the next three planned orders to production orders.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders

Planned Orders x

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Planning Plant 1010

MRP Controller P##

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Convert Planned Order

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Convert Planned Order selected

Order Type PO##

Choose Execute.
Select the next three planned orders and click the Convert Planned Order icon.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The converted planned orders have disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. Check the result of the planned order conversion.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 130

 Solution 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

Hint:
In the app, you can change the area of responsibility in the app settings of
your user.

In the Mange Production Orders Screen, check the result of the planned order conversion.
Three production orders for material T-FSP1## with order quantity 30 PC should be
displayed.
Choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

6. Reduce the stock of material component T-RSP1## to 80 PC.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stock of
material component T-RSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-RSP1##.
Check the stock for storage location 101B. Select this storage location and choose Manage
Stock.
In the Manage Stock screen, choose the Unrestricted-Use Stock button.
In the Manage Stock dialog box, make the following entries:

Field Value

Stock Change: Scrapping

Quantity Quantity required to reduce the stock to 80 PC

Post the goods issue.

Choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 3: Perform a First Material Availability Check

You carry out a first material availability check and interpret the results.

1. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1##.

In the backend system, choose transaction CO09 Availability Overview.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Material T-RSP1##

Plant 1010

Checking Rule SO

Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 131

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

OrdRes

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

a) You should find the following situation:
Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt 80 80

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 0 80

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 0 80

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 0 80

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
In the Mange Production Orders Screen, click in the first line to display the details of the
corresponding production order.
Choose Edit Order. The production order will be opened in a new tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the production order header, choose the i (Status) icon. Has a material availability
check already been carried out when the order was created? Note the corresponding
status:
>

Why was the availability check performed or why not?

a) The following status is set:
MANC [Link] not checked

According to the Customizing settings in the checking control, availability was not
checked when the planned order was converted.

4. In the production order header, choose the Material (Check Material Availability) button.
Note the status again:

>

Save the order and Close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 132

 Solution 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

a) The following status is set:

MACM Material committed

5. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, refresh (F5) the Manage Production Orders screen and choose
Components.
A green bar is displayed in the Coverage column. The committed quantities are displayed.
Navigate Back to the Mange Production Orders overview.
Don’t close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

6. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1## again.

In the backend system, Refresh the Availability Overview.
Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

OrdRes

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

a) You should find the following situation:
Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt 80 50

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 0 50

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 0 50

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 30 50

Task 4: Perform another Material Availability Check

You carry out another material availability check for the next production order and check and
interpret the results.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, in the Mange Production Orders Screen, click in second line to
display the details of the next production order.
Choose Edit Order. The production order will be opened in a new tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the production order header, choose the Release Order button to release the order.
Has a material availability check been carried out when the order was released? Note the
corresponding status:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 133

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

>

Why was the availability check performed or why not?

Save the order and Close the tab.
a) The following status is set:
MACM Material committed

According to the Customizing settings in the checking control, availability was

automatically checked when the production was released.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, navigate Back to the Mange Production Orders overview.
Don’t close the app.
a) Follow the instructions in the exercise.

4. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1## again.

In the backend system, Refresh the Availability Overview.
Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

OrdRes

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

a) You should find the following situation:
Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt 80 20

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 0 20

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 30 20

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 30 20

Task 5: Perform another Material Availability Check and Analyze Missing Parts
You carry out another material availability check for the last production order. You must
analyze and process a missing parts situation.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, in the Mange Production Orders Screen, click in third line to
display the details of the last production order.
Choose Edit Order. The production order will be opened in a new tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 134

 Solution 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

2. In the production order header, choose the Material (Check Material Availability) button.
The Availability Check dialog box and the following message is displayed:
Non-Availability of Material for order / Further Processing.
Choose the Missing Parts List button and note the information in the list in the following
table:

Material Requirement quantity Conf./Allocated qty.

>

Note the corresponding status:

>

Choose the Release Order button.

The Release Order dialog box is displayed. You could choose the Release Order button to
release the order.
Why is it possible to release the order?
Save the order and Close the tab.
a) The following information is displayed in the missing parts list:
Material Requirement quantity Conf./Allocated qty.

T-RSP1## 30 20

The following status is set:

MSPT Material shortage

According to the Customizing settings in the checking control, a user can decide on
release if parts are missing.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, refresh (F5) the Mange Production Orders screen and choose
Issues.
The following issue is displayed: Component Missing: T-RSP1##.
Choose Components.
For material component T-RSP1##, the bar in the Coverage column is partly green and
partly red. The committed quantities and the missing quantities are displayed.
Navigate Back to the Mange Production Orders overview.
The Component Issue is displayed for the corresponding production order.
Don’t close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1## again.

In the backend system, Refresh the Availability Overview.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 135

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

OrdRes

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

a) You should find the following situation:
Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt 80 0

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 20 0

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 30 0

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 30 0

5. Analyze the material shortage in the missing parts information system.

Don’t close the availability overview. Choose New GUI Window.
In the new window, choose transaction CO24.
In the initial screen of the missing parts information system, enter plant 1010 and material
T-RSP1##.
Choose Execute and check the information displayed in the list.
Finally, Exit the information system.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

6. Check how material availability checks can be performed in mass processing.

In the second window, choose the corresponding transaction COHV.
Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 136

 Solution 14: Set Up and Perform Material Availability Checks

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Syst. Status TECO

Excl. x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Material Availability Check

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Material Availability Check selected

Reset Availability Data x

Scope of Process ATP check for all materials

Choose Execute.
The Mass Processing – Order Headers list displays the three orders for which you have
performed material availability checks.
The first order has the status MSPT, the other orders have the status MACM.
Select all orders and choose the Material Availability Check icon.
Choose List → Refresh.
Now the last order has the status MSPT, the other orders have the status MACM.
According to the mass processing settings, the availability checks for all orders were
initially reset and then an availability check was carried out again. The orders were
processed one after the other according to their sorting.
Finally, Exit mass processing.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

7. Analyze the availability of material component T-RSP1## again.

In the first window, Refresh the Availability Overview.
Note the current availability of the material in the following table:

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt

OrdRes

OrdRes

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 137

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

OrdRes

Don’t close the transaction.

a) You should find the following situation:
Date MRP element Rec./reqd qty Confirmed Cum. ATP qty

Today SLocSt 80 0

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 30 0

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 30 0

Requ. Date OrdRes 30- 20 0

8. You can also reset the availability data in an individual order.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, in the Mange Production Orders screen, display the details of a
production order and edit the order.
In the production order, choose More → Functions → Availability Check → Reset Material.
Note the corresponding status:

>

a) The following status is set:

MANC [Link] not checked

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 138

 Unit 4
Exercise 15
Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling
Tools

Business Scenario
As a capacity planner, you are responsible for an optimal capacity utilization of the work
centers. The capacity load of the work centers should not be too high or too low in certain
periods. Furthermore, the orders should be assigned to the work centers in an optimal
sequence.
Various tools for capacity evaluation and capacity leveling are available for this purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Prepare a Test Scenario

You prepare a simple scenario to learn about the basic functions of capacity evaluation and
capacity leveling.

1. Change the planned independent requirements for your product T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage PIRs tile.
In the Manage PIRs screen, click in the line of material T-FSP1##.
Change the planned independent as follows:

Period Draft PIRs

Actual week 0

Actual week +1 week 0

Actual week + 2 weeks 150

Actual week + 3 weeks 0

Actual week + 4 weeks 0

Actual week + 5 weeks 0

Actual week + 6 weeks 0

Actual week + 7 weeks 0

Actual week + 8 weeks 0

Actual week + 9 weeks 0

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 139

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Period Draft PIRs

Actual week + 10 weeks 0

Choose Save Draft, then choose Release PIRs.

Choose Home to close the app.

2. Set all production orders for production supervisor P## to technically complete.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

Syst. Status TECO

Excl. x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Technically Complete

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Technically Complete selected

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Order Headers list, select all production orders and choose
Technically Complete.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The production orders have disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.

3. Change the lot sizing procedure of material T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Material tile.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 140

 Exercise 15: Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling Tools

Enter the material number in the initial screen, then choose view MRP 1 for plant 1010.
In the MRP 1 view, enter the following data:

Field Value

Lot Sizing Procedure FX

Fixed lot size 20

Save the material and choose Exit to leave the material master maintenance.

4. Start an MRP run for material T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to check the current
situation for material T-FSP1##.
In the Find Material dialog box, enter material number T-FSP1## and plant 1010.
In the stock/requirements list, choose Start MRP Run.
As a result, several planned orders with quantity 20 PC will be created for the independent
requirement. All planned orders have been created on the same date.
Choose Home to close the app.

5. Convert the planned orders to production orders.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Schedule Order Conversion Runs tile to schedule a
planned order conversion run.
In the Application Jobs screen, choose New.
In the New Job screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Job Template Convert Planned Order at Opening Date

Job Name P## Planned Order Conversion

Start Immediately X

Planning Plant 1010

MRP Controller P##

Relative Opening Date Delete all conditions

Order Type Production Orders PO##

Order Type for Process Orders YBM2

Choose Schedule to start the conversion run.

In the Application Jobs screen, choose Go to refresh the screen. Wait until your job has
been finished.
Finally choose Home to close the app.

6. Check the result of the planned order conversion.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 141

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to check the current
situation for material T-FSP1##.
In the Find Material dialog box, enter material number T-FSP1## and plant 1010.
As a result of the conversion run, the planned orders have been converted to production
orders. All production orders have been created on the same date.
Choose Home to close the app.

7. Fill up the stock of material component T-RSP1## to 2000 PC.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stock of
material component T-RSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-RSP1##.
Check the stock for storage location 101B. Select this storage location and choose Manage
Stock.
In the Manage Stock screen, choose the Unrestricted-Use Stock button.
In the Manage Stock dialog box, make the following entries:

Field Value

Stock Change: Initial Entry

Quantity Quantity required to increase the stock to 2000 PC

Post the goods receipt.

Choose Home to close the app.

Task 2: Perform Capacity Evaluations

As a capacity planner, you analyze the capacity utilization of your work centers.

1. Check which work centers are assigned to your production orders.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
Click in the line of a production order to display the order details.
Choose Order Schedule and note the following data:

Operation Work Center

>

>

>

Choose Home to close the app.

2. Check the settings for capacity planning in work center T-BK1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Work Center tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter plant 1010 and work center T-BK1##.
In the work center, choose the Capacities tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 142

 Exercise 15: Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling Tools

Choose the Form. button to display the formulas for calculating the capacity requirements
for setup and for processing.
Double-click capacity category 001.
Note the following settings:

Field Value

Capacity Responsible

Start Time

End Time

Length of Breaks

Operating time

No. Ind. Capacities

Capacity

Relevant to Finite Scheduling

Is this work center relevant for finite scheduling?

3. Also check the settings for capacity planning in the work centers T-BK2## and T-BK3##.
Note the following settings:

Field Value

Capacity Responsible

Relevant to Finite Scheduling

Are these work center relevant for finite scheduling?

4. Analyze the capacity load of the work centers for capacity planner P##.
In the back-end system, choose transaction CM01.
Enter the following data in the selection screen:

Field Value

Work Center

Capacity Planner Group P##

Plant 1010

Choose Enter to display the Capacity Planning: Standard Overview.

The capacity requirements, the available capacities and the capacity load are initially
displayed in a weekly period. The period and other settings could be changed interactively.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 143

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Analyze the capacity load of your work centers. Are there periods with capacity
overloads?
Double-click a line of a period with an overload to display the requirements in detail. You
find information on the orders and their capacity requirements within the selected period.

Task 3: Perform Capacity Leveling

As a capacity planner, you perform capacity leveling in the graphical planning table by
dispatching operations to work centers.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CM21.

Enter the following data in the selection screen:

Field Value

Work Center

Plant 1010

Capacity category

Capacity Responsible Planner P##

Choose Continue (F8) to enter the planning table.

In the upper part of the planning board, the available capacities of the work centers are
displayed. In the lower part, the operations of the orders are displayed. The operations
were scheduled infinitely when the orders were created. The capacity requirements of
other orders had not been taken into account. In the graphical planning table, finite
scheduling can be performed by dispatching operations to work centers, thus
guaranteeing of available capacities for specific times.
Choose Strategy to display the settings of the strategy profile. Check the following
settings:

Field Value

Finite Scheduling

Plan. Direction forwards

Close the strategy profile.

2. Choose Settings → Scale → Daily Period Split

Select all operations 0020 for work center T-BK2## and choose the Dispatch (F5) icon.
Interpret the result.

3. Select one of the dispatched operation and choose the Change Order button.
In the production order, choose Operations to display the operation overview.
What new status has been set for the dispatched operation 0020?

>

What is the impact of this status?

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 144

 Exercise 15: Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling Tools

__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________

4. Now select an operation 0010 for work center T-BK1## and choose the Dispatch (F5)
icon.
The operation cannot be dispatched.
Choose the [Link]. button to check the planning log and display the error messages.
Interpret the error message.
Navigate back to the planning table and choose the Capacity button for the selected
operation 0010 to display the capacity settings of work center T-BK1##.
What setting is responsible for the fact that the operation cannot be dispatched?
Exit the planning table. Don’t save the planning table.

Note:
Don’t save the planning table.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 145

 Unit 4
Solution 15
Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling
Tools

Business Scenario
As a capacity planner, you are responsible for an optimal capacity utilization of the work
centers. The capacity load of the work centers should not be too high or too low in certain
periods. Furthermore, the orders should be assigned to the work centers in an optimal
sequence.
Various tools for capacity evaluation and capacity leveling are available for this purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Prepare a Test Scenario

You prepare a simple scenario to learn about the basic functions of capacity evaluation and
capacity leveling.

1. Change the planned independent requirements for your product T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage PIRs tile.
In the Manage PIRs screen, click in the line of material T-FSP1##.
Change the planned independent as follows:

Period Draft PIRs

Actual week 0

Actual week +1 week 0

Actual week + 2 weeks 150

Actual week + 3 weeks 0

Actual week + 4 weeks 0

Actual week + 5 weeks 0

Actual week + 6 weeks 0

Actual week + 7 weeks 0

Actual week + 8 weeks 0

Actual week + 9 weeks 0

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 146

 Solution 15: Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling Tools

Period Draft PIRs

Actual week + 10 weeks 0

Choose Save Draft, then choose Release PIRs.

Choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Set all production orders for production supervisor P## to technically complete.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

Syst. Status TECO

Excl. x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Technically Complete

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Technically Complete selected

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Order Headers list, select all production orders and choose
Technically Complete.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The production orders have disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 147

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

3. Change the lot sizing procedure of material T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Material tile.
Enter the material number in the initial screen, then choose view MRP 1 for plant 1010.
In the MRP 1 view, enter the following data:

Field Value

Lot Sizing Procedure FX

Fixed lot size 20

Save the material and choose Exit to leave the material master maintenance.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. Start an MRP run for material T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to check the current
situation for material T-FSP1##.
In the Find Material dialog box, enter material number T-FSP1## and plant 1010.
In the stock/requirements list, choose Start MRP Run.
As a result, several planned orders with quantity 20 PC will be created for the independent
requirement. All planned orders have been created on the same date.
Choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. Convert the planned orders to production orders.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Schedule Order Conversion Runs tile to schedule a
planned order conversion run.
In the Application Jobs screen, choose New.
In the New Job screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Job Template Convert Planned Order at Opening Date

Job Name P## Planned Order Conversion

Start Immediately X

Planning Plant 1010

MRP Controller P##

Relative Opening Date Delete all conditions

Order Type Production Orders PO##

Order Type for Process Orders YBM2

Choose Schedule to start the conversion run.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 148

 Solution 15: Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling Tools

In the Application Jobs screen, choose Go to refresh the screen. Wait until your job has
been finished.
Finally choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

6. Check the result of the planned order conversion.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Check Material Coverage tile to check the current
situation for material T-FSP1##.
In the Find Material dialog box, enter material number T-FSP1## and plant 1010.
As a result of the conversion run, the planned orders have been converted to production
orders. All production orders have been created on the same date.
Choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

7. Fill up the stock of material component T-RSP1## to 2000 PC.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock – Single Material tile to analyze the stock of
material component T-RSP1##.
In the Stock – Single Material screen, enter the material number T-RSP1##.
Check the stock for storage location 101B. Select this storage location and choose Manage
Stock.
In the Manage Stock screen, choose the Unrestricted-Use Stock button.
In the Manage Stock dialog box, make the following entries:

Field Value

Stock Change: Initial Entry

Quantity Quantity required to increase the stock to 2000 PC

Post the goods receipt.

Choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Perform Capacity Evaluations

As a capacity planner, you analyze the capacity utilization of your work centers.

1. Check which work centers are assigned to your production orders.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
Click in the line of a production order to display the order details.
Choose Order Schedule and note the following data:

Operation Work Center

>

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 149

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Operation Work Center

>

Choose Home to close the app.

a) The following work centers are assigned:
Operation Work Center

0010 T-BK1##

0020 T-BK2##

0030 T-BK3##

2. Check the settings for capacity planning in work center T-BK1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Work Center tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter plant 1010 and work center T-BK1##.
In the work center, choose the Capacities tab.
Choose the Form. button to display the formulas for calculating the capacity requirements
for setup and for processing.
Double-click capacity category 001.
Note the following settings:

Field Value

Capacity Responsible

Start Time

End Time

Length of Breaks

Operating time

No. Ind. Capacities

Capacity

Relevant to Finite Scheduling

Is this work center relevant for finite scheduling?

a) The settings are as follows:
Field Value

Capacity Responsible P##

Start Time [Link]

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 150

 Solution 15: Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling Tools

Field Value

End Time [Link]

Length of Breaks [Link]

Operating time 8,00 H

No. Ind. Capacities 1

Capacity 480 MIN

Relevant to Finite Scheduling

This work center is not relevant for finite scheduling.

3. Also check the settings for capacity planning in the work centers T-BK2## and T-BK3##.
Note the following settings:

Field Value

Capacity Responsible

Relevant to Finite Scheduling

Are these work center relevant for finite scheduling?

a) The settings are as follows:
Field Value

Capacity Responsible P##

Relevant to Finite Scheduling x

These work centers are relevant for finite scheduling.

4. Analyze the capacity load of the work centers for capacity planner P##.
In the back-end system, choose transaction CM01.
Enter the following data in the selection screen:

Field Value

Work Center

Capacity Planner Group P##

Plant 1010

Choose Enter to display the Capacity Planning: Standard Overview.

The capacity requirements, the available capacities and the capacity load are initially
displayed in a weekly period. The period and other settings could be changed interactively.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 151

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Analyze the capacity load of your work centers. Are there periods with capacity
overloads?
Double-click a line of a period with an overload to display the requirements in detail. You
find information on the orders and their capacity requirements within the selected period.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 3: Perform Capacity Leveling

As a capacity planner, you perform capacity leveling in the graphical planning table by
dispatching operations to work centers.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CM21.

Enter the following data in the selection screen:

Field Value

Work Center

Plant 1010

Capacity category

Capacity Responsible Planner P##

Choose Continue (F8) to enter the planning table.

In the upper part of the planning board, the available capacities of the work centers are
displayed. In the lower part, the operations of the orders are displayed. The operations
were scheduled infinitely when the orders were created. The capacity requirements of
other orders had not been taken into account. In the graphical planning table, finite
scheduling can be performed by dispatching operations to work centers, thus
guaranteeing of available capacities for specific times.
Choose Strategy to display the settings of the strategy profile. Check the following
settings:

Field Value

Finite Scheduling

Plan. Direction forwards

Close the strategy profile.

a) The settings are as follows:
Field Value

Finite Scheduling x

Plan. Direction forwards x

2. Choose Settings → Scale → Daily Period Split

Select all operations 0020 for work center T-BK2## and choose the Dispatch (F5) icon.
Interpret the result.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 152

 Solution 15: Use Capacity Evaluation and Capacity Leveling Tools

a) The selected operations have been dispatched to work center T-BK2##. Finite
scheduling in forward direction was carried out.
For the other non-dispatched operations, an infinite midpoint scheduling was carried
out based on the dispatched operations. The proceeding operations 0010 were
scheduled backwards and the subsequent operations 0030 were scheduled forward.

3. Select one of the dispatched operation and choose the Change Order button.
In the production order, choose Operations to display the operation overview.
What new status has been set for the dispatched operation 0020?

>

What is the impact of this status?

__________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
a) The following status has been set:
DSPT Scheduled

The dispatched operation is fixed in time. It cannot be moved by infinite scheduling, for
example by changing the basic dates of an order and scheduling the order.
Rescheduling of this operation is only possible by finite scheduling in the planning
table. Infinite scheduling would be only possible again after deallocating the operation.

4. Now select an operation 0010 for work center T-BK1## and choose the Dispatch (F5)
icon.
The operation cannot be dispatched.
Choose the [Link]. button to check the planning log and display the error messages.
Interpret the error message.
Navigate back to the planning table and choose the Capacity button for the selected
operation 0010 to display the capacity settings of work center T-BK1##.
What setting is responsible for the fact that the operation cannot be dispatched?
Exit the planning table. Don’t save the planning table.

Note:
Don’t save the planning table.

a) The work center capacity is not valid for finite scheduling.

The following indicator is not set: Relevant to Finite Scheduling.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 153

 Unit 4
Exercise 16
Release Production Orders

Business Scenario
The order release is the basis for the further processing of the production order. As a
production supervisor, you schedule order release runs. You also need to know other
alternatives for order release

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Release Individual Operations and Individual Production Orders

As a production supervisor, you need to know how to release individual operations and
individual orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
Several production orders for material T-FSP1## should be displayed.
What status do the orders have?

Status

>

2. Click in the line of the first production order to display the order details.
Choose Order Schedule and note the status of the operations:

Operation Status

>

>

>

3. Click in the line of the second operation 0020 to display the operation details.
Choose Release to release the operation.
A message will be displayed. Is it possible to release the operation? Display the details of
the message.

4. Click in the line of the first operation 0010 to display the operation details.
Choose Release to release the operation.
A message will be displayed. Has the operation been released?

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 154

 Exercise 16: Release Production Orders

What status does the operation have?

Status

>

5. Navigate Back to the overview of the production orders.

What status does the first orders have?

Status

>

6. Select the first order and choose Edit.

A new tab with the title Production order Change will be opened.
Choose Operations to navigate to the operations overview.
Select operations 0020 and 0030 and choose the Release operation icon.
A message will be displayed. Have the operations been released?
What status does the operations have?

Status

>

Save the order and Close the tab.

7. Refresh (F5) the overview of the production orders.

What status does the first order have?

Status

>

8. Select the next order with status Created and choose Release.
How does the status of the order change?

Status

>

Finally, choose Home to leave the app.

Task 2: Release Production Orders in Mass Processing and in an Order Release Run
As a production supervisor, you use mass processing and schedule order release runs to
effectively organize order release.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Release Production Orders tile
A new tab with the title Release Production Orders will be opened.
Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 155

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Note:
You could also choose the list Operations to run mass processing for the
release of operations.

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Release selected

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Order Headers list, the production orders for material T-FSP1##
with status Created will be displayed.
Select the next two orders and choose Release icon.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The released production orders have disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
Check whether the production orders released in mass processing have the status
Released.
Choose Home to leave the app.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Schedule Order Release Runs tile to schedule an
order release run.
In the Application Jobs screen, choose New.
In the New Job screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Job Template Release Order at Scheduled Release Date

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 156

 Exercise 16: Release Production Orders

Field Value

Job Name P## Order Release

Start Immediately X

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

For all Dates Delete all conditions

Choose Schedule to start the release run.

In the Application Jobs screen, choose Go to refresh the screen. Wait until your job has
been finished.
Finally choose Home to close the app.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
Check whether the production orders released in the order release run have the status
Released.
Choose Home to leave the app.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 157

 Unit 4
Solution 16
Release Production Orders

Business Scenario
The order release is the basis for the further processing of the production order. As a
production supervisor, you schedule order release runs. You also need to know other
alternatives for order release

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Release Individual Operations and Individual Production Orders

As a production supervisor, you need to know how to release individual operations and
individual orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
Several production orders for material T-FSP1## should be displayed.
What status do the orders have?

Status

>

a) All orders have the following status:

Status

Created

2. Click in the line of the first production order to display the order details.
Choose Order Schedule and note the status of the operations:

Operation Status

>

>

>

a) The operations have the following status:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 158

 Solution 16: Release Production Orders

Operation Status

0010 Created

0020 Created

0030 Created

3. Click in the line of the second operation 0020 to display the operation details.
Choose Release to release the operation.
A message will be displayed. Is it possible to release the operation? Display the details of
the message.
a) The operation cannot be released.
The following error message is displayed: Operation of order could not be released.
The following details are displayed: Operation cannot be released (op. 0010, order,
sequence 0 is not released)

4. Click in the line of the first operation 0010 to display the operation details.
Choose Release to release the operation.
A message will be displayed. Has the operation been released?
What status does the operation have?

Status

>

a) The operation has been released.

The following message is displayed: Operation 0010 of order has successfully been
released.

Status

Released

5. Navigate Back to the overview of the production orders.

What status does the first orders have?

Status

>

a) The first order has the following status:

Status

Partially Released

6. Select the first order and choose Edit.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 159

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

A new tab with the title Production order Change will be opened.
Choose Operations to navigate to the operations overview.
Select operations 0020 and 0030 and choose the Release operation icon.
A message will be displayed. Have the operations been released?
What status does the operations have?

Status

>

Save the order and Close the tab.

a) The operations have been released.
The following message is displayed: Release carried out.

Status

REL Released

7. Refresh (F5) the overview of the production orders.

What status does the first order have?

Status

>

a) The first order has the following status:

Status

Released

8. Select the next order with status Created and choose Release.
How does the status of the order change?

Status

>

Finally, choose Home to leave the app.

a) The order has the following status after order release:
Status

Released

Task 2: Release Production Orders in Mass Processing and in an Order Release Run
As a production supervisor, you use mass processing and schedule order release runs to
effectively organize order release.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 160

 Solution 16: Release Production Orders

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Release Production Orders tile
A new tab with the title Release Production Orders will be opened.
Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Note:
You could also choose the list Operations to run mass processing for the
release of operations.

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Release selected

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Order Headers list, the production orders for material T-FSP1##
with status Created will be displayed.
Select the next two orders and choose Release icon.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The released production orders have disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
Check whether the production orders released in mass processing have the status
Released.
Choose Home to leave the app.
a) Four production orders should have the status Released now.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Schedule Order Release Runs tile to schedule an
order release run.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 161

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

In the Application Jobs screen, choose New.

In the New Job screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Job Template Release Order at Scheduled Release Date

Job Name P## Order Release

Start Immediately X

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

For all Dates Delete all conditions

Choose Schedule to start the release run.

In the Application Jobs screen, choose Go to refresh the screen. Wait until your job has
been finished.
Finally choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production orders for production supervisor P##.
Check whether the production orders released in the order release run have the status
Released.
Choose Home to leave the app.
a) All production orders should now have the status Released.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 162

 Unit 4
Exercise 17
Define and Test a Production Scheduling
Profile

Business Scenario
Using a production scheduling profile, the processing of a production order can be made
more effective. As a member of the project team or as a production supervisor, you must be
able to define production scheduling profiles and to assign them to materials.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Define a Production Scheduling Profile

Define a production scheduling profile and assign it to your product.

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, define a production scheduling

profile
Choose transaction SPRO and click the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Define Production Scheduling Profile.
In the Production Scheduling Profile: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
In the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following data and define the
following settings:

Field Value

Plant 1010

Prod. Sched. Profile GR##

GR## Auto Rel., Doc., Print

Automatic Actions
On Creation
Field Value

Release x

Document Links - Material x

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 163

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Automatic Actions
On Creation
Field Value

Document Links - BOM x

Automatic Actions
On Release
Field Value

Execute Printing x

Schedule Order x

Order Type
Field Value

Make-to-Stock Production PO##

Make-to-Order Production PO##

Engineer-to-Order Prodn. YBM1

Without Material YBM1

Save your production scheduling profile.

2. Assign your production scheduling profile to your product T-FSP1##

In the backend system, choose transaction MM02.
Enter the material number T-FSP1## in the initial screen, then choose the Work
Scheduling view for plant 1010.
In the Work Scheduling view, assign scheduling profile GR##.
Save the material.

Task 2: Test the Production Scheduling Profile

Create a production order for your product to test the settings of the production scheduling
profile.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create the production order.
In the initial screen, enter plant 1010 and material T-FSP1##.
Don’t enter an order type.

Note:
Don’t enter an order type.

Choose Enter. The production order Create: Header screen will be displayed.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 164

 Exercise 17: Define and Test a Production Scheduling Profile

With reference to which order type will the order be created?

Field Value

Order Type

2. The total quantity of 20 PC was taken from the material master.

Choose any basic start date in the near future and choose Enter to create the order.
Save the order and note the order number:

>

3. Choose transaction CO02 to display the order again.

What activities have been carried out automatically on order creation due to the settings
in the production scheduling profile?
In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check and note the corresponding
status:

Status Text

>

>

In the order header, choose the Documents button to check whether documents have
been linked automatically to the order. Note the documents in the following table:

Document Origin

>

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 165

 Unit 4
Solution 17
Define and Test a Production Scheduling
Profile

Business Scenario
Using a production scheduling profile, the processing of a production order can be made
more effective. As a member of the project team or as a production supervisor, you must be
able to define production scheduling profiles and to assign them to materials.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Define a Production Scheduling Profile

Define a production scheduling profile and assign it to your product.

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, define a production scheduling

profile
Choose transaction SPRO and click the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Define Production Scheduling Profile.
In the Production Scheduling Profile: Overview screen, choose New Entries.
In the New Entries: Details of Added Entries screen, enter the following data and define the
following settings:

Field Value

Plant 1010

Prod. Sched. Profile GR##

GR## Auto Rel., Doc., Print

Automatic Actions
On Creation
Field Value

Release x

Document Links - Material x

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 166

 Solution 17: Define and Test a Production Scheduling Profile

Automatic Actions
On Creation
Field Value

Document Links - BOM x

Automatic Actions
On Release
Field Value

Execute Printing x

Schedule Order x

Order Type
Field Value

Make-to-Stock Production PO##

Make-to-Order Production PO##

Engineer-to-Order Prodn. YBM1

Without Material YBM1

Save your production scheduling profile.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise

2. Assign your production scheduling profile to your product T-FSP1##

In the backend system, choose transaction MM02.
Enter the material number T-FSP1## in the initial screen, then choose the Work
Scheduling view for plant 1010.
In the Work Scheduling view, assign scheduling profile GR##.
Save the material.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise

Task 2: Test the Production Scheduling Profile

Create a production order for your product to test the settings of the production scheduling
profile.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create the production order.
In the initial screen, enter plant 1010 and material T-FSP1##.
Don’t enter an order type.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 167

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Note:
Don’t enter an order type.

Choose Enter. The production order Create: Header screen will be displayed.
With reference to which order type will the order be created?

Field Value

Order Type

a) Due to the corresponding setting in the production scheduling profile, the order will be
created with reference to the following order type:
Field Value

Order Type PO##

2. The total quantity of 20 PC was taken from the material master.

Choose any basic start date in the near future and choose Enter to create the order.
Save the order and note the order number:

>

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. Choose transaction CO02 to display the order again.

What activities have been carried out automatically on order creation due to the settings
in the production scheduling profile?
In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check and note the corresponding
status:

Status Text

>

>

In the order header, choose the Documents button to check whether documents have
been linked automatically to the order. Note the documents in the following table:

Document Origin

>

>

a) Due to the settings in the production scheduling profile, the following activities have
been carried out automatically on order release:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 168

 Solution 17: Define and Test a Production Scheduling Profile

The order has been released and printed. The documents of the material master and
the document items of the BOM have been linked.

Status Text

REL Released

PRT Printed

Document Origin

T-DSP100 Bill of Material

T-DSP200 Material

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 169

 Unit 4
Exercise 18
Analyze and Test a User Status Profile

Business Scenario
The processing of production orders is controlled using statuses. A status allows or forbids
the execution of certain business processes. On the other hand, a status may be set or
deleted by the execution of a business process.
The system statuses can be complemented by user statuses. Using a user status profile, the
processing of a production order can be influenced according to customer requirements.
As a member of the project team or as a production supervisor, you must be able to define
user status profiles and to assign them to order types.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Analyze a User Status Profile and Assign it to an Order Type

A user status profile has been defined with the following function: The goods receipt for a
production order cannot be posted until the order has been confirmed.
Analyze the user status profile and assign it to your order type.

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, analyze the user status profile
GRAFTCON.
Choose transaction SPRO and click the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define status profile
In the Change Status: Overview screen, double-click the status profile GRAFTCON Goods
Receipt after Conf. and note the user status in the following table:

Status Short Text Init. status

>

>

2. Double-click status GRNO and note the settings in the transaction control:
Business Transaction Influence Next action

>

3. Double-click status GROK and note the settings in the transaction control:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 170

 Exercise 18: Analyze and Test a User Status Profile

Business Transaction Influence Next action

>

4. In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, assign the user status profile
GRAFTCON to your order type PO##.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define Order Types.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Overview screen, select the line of your order type
PO## and choose the Details icon.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Details screen, enter the following value:

Field Value

StatusProfile Header GRAFTCON

Save your order type. Confirm an information message about the number ranges.

5. You must define confirmation parameters for your order type in order to be able to post
confirmations.
In the Customizing environment of the backend system, create the confirmation
parameters for your order type PO## in plant 1010 by copying the settings for order type
YBM1.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Confirmation → Define Confirmation
Parameters.
In the Parameters for Order Confirmation: Overview, select the line of order type YBM1 and
plant 1010 choose Copy As.
Overwrite order type YBM1 with your order type:

Order Type

PO##

Press Enter to copy the settings. Finally Save your confirmation parameters.

Task 2: Test the User Status Profile

Create a production order for your product to test the settings of the user status profile.

1. In the back-end system, choose transaction CO01 to create the production order.
In the initial screen, enter plant 1010 and material T-FSP1##. You don’t need to enter an
order type.
Choose Enter. The production order Create: Header screen will be displayed.
Due to the corresponding setting in the production scheduling profile, the order will be
created with reference to your order type PO##.
The total quantity of 20 PC has been taken from the material master.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 171

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Choose any basic start date in the near future and choose Enter to create the order.
Save the order and note the order number:

>

2. Choose transaction CO03 to display the order again.

In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check and note the user status:

Status with Status Number

X Status Text

>

>

Interpret the result.

Choose the Business processes tab to check, whether goods receipts for the production
order are permitted.
Exit the order.

3. Choose transaction MIGO to post the goods receipt for your production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order and enter the number of your production order.
A message will be displayed. Is it possible to post a goods receipt for your order?
Exit the transaction.

4. Choose transaction CO15 to confirm your production order.

Enter your order number in the initial screen, choose Enter, and finally Save the
confirmation.

5. Choose transaction CO03 to display the order again.

In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check and note the user status:

Status with Status Number

X Status Text

>

>

Choose the Business processes tab to check, whether goods receipts for the production
order are permitted.
Interpret the result.
Exit the order.

6. Choose transaction MIGO again to post the goods receipt for your production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order and enter the number of your production order.
Set the OK flag, Check the data, and finally Post the goods receipt.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 172

 Exercise 18: Analyze and Test a User Status Profile

7. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, undo the assignment of the user
status profile GRAFTCON to your order type PO##.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 173

 Unit 4
Solution 18
Analyze and Test a User Status Profile

Business Scenario
The processing of production orders is controlled using statuses. A status allows or forbids
the execution of certain business processes. On the other hand, a status may be set or
deleted by the execution of a business process.
The system statuses can be complemented by user statuses. Using a user status profile, the
processing of a production order can be influenced according to customer requirements.
As a member of the project team or as a production supervisor, you must be able to define
user status profiles and to assign them to order types.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Analyze a User Status Profile and Assign it to an Order Type

A user status profile has been defined with the following function: The goods receipt for a
production order cannot be posted until the order has been confirmed.
Analyze the user status profile and assign it to your order type.

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, analyze the user status profile
GRAFTCON.
Choose transaction SPRO and click the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define status profile
In the Change Status: Overview screen, double-click the status profile GRAFTCON Goods
Receipt after Conf. and note the user status in the following table:

Status Short Text Init. status

>

>

a) The following status are defined:

Status Short Text Init. status

GRNO No Goods Receipt x

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 174

 Solution 18: Analyze and Test a User Status Profile

Status Short Text Init. status

GROK Goods Receipt O.K.

2. Double-click status GRNO and note the settings in the transaction control:
Business Transaction Influence Next action

>

a) The following settings are defined:

Business Transaction Influence Next action

Goods receipt for prodn. order Forbidd. No action

3. Double-click status GROK and note the settings in the transaction control:
Business Transaction Influence Next action

>

a) The following settings are defined:

Business Transaction Influence Next action

Confirm order No influence Set

4. In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, assign the user status profile
GRAFTCON to your order type PO##.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Order → Define Order Types.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Overview screen, select the line of your order type
PO## and choose the Details icon.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Details screen, enter the following value:

Field Value

StatusProfile Header GRAFTCON

Save your order type. Confirm an information message about the number ranges.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. You must define confirmation parameters for your order type in order to be able to post
confirmations.
In the Customizing environment of the backend system, create the confirmation
parameters for your order type PO## in plant 1010 by copying the settings for order type
YBM1.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 175

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Confirmation → Define Confirmation

Parameters.
In the Parameters for Order Confirmation: Overview, select the line of order type YBM1 and
plant 1010 choose Copy As.
Overwrite order type YBM1 with your order type:

Order Type

PO##

Press Enter to copy the settings. Finally Save your confirmation parameters.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Test the User Status Profile

Create a production order for your product to test the settings of the user status profile.

1. In the back-end system, choose transaction CO01 to create the production order.
In the initial screen, enter plant 1010 and material T-FSP1##. You don’t need to enter an
order type.
Choose Enter. The production order Create: Header screen will be displayed.
Due to the corresponding setting in the production scheduling profile, the order will be
created with reference to your order type PO##.
The total quantity of 20 PC has been taken from the material master.
Choose any basic start date in the near future and choose Enter to create the order.
Save the order and note the order number:

>

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Choose transaction CO03 to display the order again.

In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check and note the user status:

Status with Status Number

X Status Text

>

>

Interpret the result.

Choose the Business processes tab to check, whether goods receipts for the production
order are permitted.
Exit the order.
a) Due to the settings in the user status profile, the following user status are available:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 176

 Solution 18: Analyze and Test a User Status Profile

Status with Status Number

X Status Text

x GRNO No Goods Receipt

GROK Goods Receipt O.K.

User status GRNO has been set initially on order creation.

Goods receipts are not permitted for the production order.

3. Choose transaction MIGO to post the goods receipt for your production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order and enter the number of your production order.
A message will be displayed. Is it possible to post a goods receipt for your order?
Exit the transaction.
a) The following message will be displayed:
Current order status does not allow goods receipt.

4. Choose transaction CO15 to confirm your production order.

Enter your order number in the initial screen, choose Enter, and finally Save the
confirmation.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

5. Choose transaction CO03 to display the order again.

In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check and note the user status:

Status with Status Number

X Status Text

>

>

Choose the Business processes tab to check, whether goods receipts for the production
order are permitted.
Interpret the result.
Exit the order.
a) Due to the settings in the user status profile, user status GROK has been set as a result
of the confirmation:
Status with Status Number
X Status Text

GRNO No Goods Receipt

x GROK Goods Receipt O.K.

Goods receipts are permitted now for the production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 177

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

6. Choose transaction MIGO again to post the goods receipt for your production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order and enter the number of your production order.
Set the OK flag, Check the data, and finally Post the goods receipt.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise

7. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, undo the assignment of the user
status profile GRAFTCON to your order type PO##.
a) In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:Production → Shop Floor
Control → Master Data → Order → Define Order Types.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Overview screen, select the line of your order
type PO## and choose the Details icon.
In the Maintain Production Order Types: Details screen, undo the assignment of the
user status profile GRAFTCON.
Save your order type. Confirm an information message about the number ranges.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 178

 Unit 4
Exercise 19
Print Shop Floor Papers

Business Scenario
After production orders have been released, various employees must be informed. For this
purpose, shop floor papers can be printed, for example, goods issue slips, pick lists, time
tickets, confirmation slips, PRT overviews or object lists.
As a member of the project team, you must be able to define the corresponding Customizing
and master data settings.
Usually, the shop floor papers are printed by mass processing or background processing.
However, as a production supervisor, you may also need to print or reprint individual papers.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Analyze the Prerequisites for the Printing of Shop Floor Papers
Analyze the prerequisites for the printing of shop floor papers.

1. In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, analyze the settings for print
control.
Choose transaction SPRO and click the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Define print control.
Get an overview about the settings in the following views: Names of lists, reference order
types, forms, print programs and printer specification.

2. In the backend system, choose transaction CA03 to display the routing for your product
T-FSP1##.
Enter the material number and plant 1010 in the initial screen.
In the operation overview, display the details of control key YBP1.
Choose the input help F4 for the control key field, select control key YBP1 and choose
Detailled information. Note the following settings:

Control key YBP1

Field Value

Print Confirmation

Print Time Tickets

Print

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 179

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Control key YBP1

Field Value

Confirmations

In the operation overview, display the details of an operation.

Double-click the number of the operation and note the following settings:

Field Value

No. of Time Tickets

No. of Conf. Slips

Exit the routing.

Task 2: Prepare a Test Scenario

You prepare a test scenario for the printing of shop floor papers.

1. In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, change your production

scheduling profile GR##.
Choose transaction SPRO and press the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Define Production Scheduling Profile.
In the Production Scheduling Profile: Overview screen, select your profile GR## in plant
1010 and choose the Details icon.
In the Details screen, change the following setting:

Field New Value

Prod. Sched. Profile GR##

GR## Auto Doc.

Automatic Actions
On Creation
Field New Value

Release

Automatic Actions
On Release
Field New Value

Execute Printing

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 180

 Exercise 19: Print Shop Floor Papers

Save your changes.

2. In the backend system, choose transaction SP02 to display the List of Spool Requests.
Select all spool numbers and choose the Delete icon. Delete all requests.
Don’t exit the list. Choose the New GUI Window icon to open a second window.

Note:
Don’t exit the list. Choose the New GUI Window icon to open a second window.

Task 3: Print and Reprint Shop Floor Papers for an Individual Order
Create a production order, print and reprint shop floor papers and check the corresponding
spool requests.

1. In the second GUI window, choose transaction CO01 to create the production order.
In the initial screen, enter plant 1010 and material T-FSP1##. You don’t need to enter an
order type.
Choose Enter. The production order Create: Header screen will be displayed.
Due to the corresponding setting in the production scheduling profile, the order will be
created with reference to your order type PO##.
The total quantity of 20 PC has been taken from the material master.
Choose any basic start date in the near future and choose Enter to create the order.
Navigate to the operation overview.
Select the first operation and choose the Release operation icon to release the operation.
Navigate to the order header and choose Functions → Print.
You get the following message: After the next update the order will be printed.
Save the order.

2. Choose transaction CO02 to change the production order.

In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check whether the order has been
printed. Note the corresponding status:

Syst. Status
Status Text

>

Don’t Exit the order.

Note:
Don’t exit the order.

3. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests.

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display some shop floor papers.
Interpret the result.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 181

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

4. In the second window, in the production order, choose Functions → Print again.
You get the following message: Copies will be printed for order (original lists already
printed).
Save the order.

5. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests again.

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display some of the new shop floor papers.
Interpret the result.

6. In the second window, choose transaction CO02 to change the production order.
Navigate to the operation overview.
Release the second operation.
Navigate to the order header.
In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check whether the print status has been
updated. Note the corresponding status:

Syst. Status
Status Text

>

Choose Functions → Print again and Save the order.

7. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests again.

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display some of the new shop floor papers.
Interpret the result.

8. In the second window, choose transaction CO02 to change the production order.
In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check whether the print status has been
updated.
Note the corresponding status:

Syst. Status
Status Text

>

Choose Functions → Print again.

You get the following message: Copies will be printed for order (original lists already
printed).
Save the order.

9. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests again.

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display some of the new shop floor papers.
Interpret the result.

Task 4: Reprint a Certain Shop Floor Paper

If you want to print or reprint a certain shop floor paper, you can use mass processing.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 182

 Exercise 19: Print Shop Floor Papers

In our test scenario, you try to reprint the confirmation slip for the second operation of your
production order.

1. In the second window, choose transaction CO04N.

In the Print Production Orders screen, enter the following header data:

Field Value

List Operations

Layout 000000000001

Enter the following data in the selection area:

Field Value

Production Order <Enter the number of your production order>

Work Center T-BK2##

Plant 1010

Reduced Reading x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area:

Field Value

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Printing of Shop Floor Papers selected

Print mode Reprint

Order Type PO##

Print list only select Confirmation slip

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Operations list, only the second operation 0020 of your
production order will be displayed.
Select the operation and choose the Printing of Shop Floor Papers icon.
Finally, Exit mass processing.

2. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests again.

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display the new shop floor paper.
Interpret the result.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 183

 Unit 4
Solution 19
Print Shop Floor Papers

Business Scenario
After production orders have been released, various employees must be informed. For this
purpose, shop floor papers can be printed, for example, goods issue slips, pick lists, time
tickets, confirmation slips, PRT overviews or object lists.
As a member of the project team, you must be able to define the corresponding Customizing
and master data settings.
Usually, the shop floor papers are printed by mass processing or background processing.
However, as a production supervisor, you may also need to print or reprint individual papers.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Analyze the Prerequisites for the Printing of Shop Floor Papers
Analyze the prerequisites for the printing of shop floor papers.

1. In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, analyze the settings for print
control.
Choose transaction SPRO and click the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Define print control.
Get an overview about the settings in the following views: Names of lists, reference order
types, forms, print programs and printer specification.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the backend system, choose transaction CA03 to display the routing for your product
T-FSP1##.
Enter the material number and plant 1010 in the initial screen.
In the operation overview, display the details of control key YBP1.
Choose the input help F4 for the control key field, select control key YBP1 and choose
Detailled information. Note the following settings:

Control key YBP1

Field Value

Print Confirmation

Print Time Tickets

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 184

 Solution 19: Print Shop Floor Papers

Control key YBP1

Field Value

Print

Confirmations

In the operation overview, display the details of an operation.

Double-click the number of the operation and note the following settings:

Field Value

No. of Time Tickets

No. of Conf. Slips

Exit the routing.

a) The following settings are defined:
Field Value

Print Confirmation x

Print Time Tickets x

Print x

Confirmations 2 Confirmation required

Field Value

No. of Time Tickets 1

No. of Conf. Slips 1

Task 2: Prepare a Test Scenario

You prepare a test scenario for the printing of shop floor papers.

1. In the Customizing environment of the back-end system, change your production

scheduling profile GR##.
Choose transaction SPRO and press the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Master Data → Define Production Scheduling Profile.
In the Production Scheduling Profile: Overview screen, select your profile GR## in plant
1010 and choose the Details icon.
In the Details screen, change the following setting:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 185

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Field New Value

Prod. Sched. Profile GR##

GR## Auto Doc.

Automatic Actions
On Creation
Field New Value

Release

Automatic Actions
On Release
Field New Value

Execute Printing

Save your changes.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the backend system, choose transaction SP02 to display the List of Spool Requests.
Select all spool numbers and choose the Delete icon. Delete all requests.
Don’t exit the list. Choose the New GUI Window icon to open a second window.

Note:
Don’t exit the list. Choose the New GUI Window icon to open a second window.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 3: Print and Reprint Shop Floor Papers for an Individual Order
Create a production order, print and reprint shop floor papers and check the corresponding
spool requests.

1. In the second GUI window, choose transaction CO01 to create the production order.
In the initial screen, enter plant 1010 and material T-FSP1##. You don’t need to enter an
order type.
Choose Enter. The production order Create: Header screen will be displayed.
Due to the corresponding setting in the production scheduling profile, the order will be
created with reference to your order type PO##.
The total quantity of 20 PC has been taken from the material master.
Choose any basic start date in the near future and choose Enter to create the order.
Navigate to the operation overview.
Select the first operation and choose the Release operation icon to release the operation.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 186

 Solution 19: Print Shop Floor Papers

Navigate to the order header and choose Functions → Print.

You get the following message: After the next update the order will be printed.
Save the order.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Choose transaction CO02 to change the production order.

In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check whether the order has been
printed. Note the corresponding status:

Syst. Status
Status Text

>

Don’t Exit the order.

Note:
Don’t exit the order.

a) The following status has been set.

Syst. Status
Status Text

PRT Printed

3. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests.

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display some shop floor papers.
Interpret the result.
a) Shop floor papers were printed with reference to the first operation.

4. In the second window, in the production order, choose Functions → Print again.
You get the following message: Copies will be printed for order (original lists already
printed).
Save the order.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests again.

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display some of the new shop floor papers.
Interpret the result.
a) Duplicates of the shop floor papers were printed with reference to the first operation.

6. In the second window, choose transaction CO02 to change the production order.
Navigate to the operation overview.
Release the second operation.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 187

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Navigate to the order header.

In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check whether the print status has been
updated. Note the corresponding status:

Syst. Status
Status Text

>

Choose Functions → Print again and Save the order.

a) The following status has been set.
Syst. Status
Status Text

PPRT Part Printed

7. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests again.

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display some of the new shop floor papers.
Interpret the result.
a) Shop floor papers were printed with reference to the second operation.

8. In the second window, choose transaction CO02 to change the production order.
In the order header, choose the i (Status) icon to check whether the print status has been
updated.
Note the corresponding status:

Syst. Status
Status Text

>

Choose Functions → Print again.

You get the following message: Copies will be printed for order (original lists already
printed).
Save the order.
a) The following status has been set.
Syst. Status
Status Text

PRT Printed

9. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests again.

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display some of the new shop floor papers.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 188

 Solution 19: Print Shop Floor Papers

Interpret the result.

a) Duplicates of the shop floor papers were printed with reference to both the first and
the second operation.

Task 4: Reprint a Certain Shop Floor Paper

If you want to print or reprint a certain shop floor paper, you can use mass processing.
In our test scenario, you try to reprint the confirmation slip for the second operation of your
production order.

1. In the second window, choose transaction CO04N.

In the Print Production Orders screen, enter the following header data:

Field Value

List Operations

Layout 000000000001

Enter the following data in the selection area:

Field Value

Production Order <Enter the number of your production order>

Work Center T-BK2##

Plant 1010

Reduced Reading x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area:

Field Value

Display applicat. toolbar x

Icon Printing of Shop Floor Papers selected

Print mode Reprint

Order Type PO##

Print list only select Confirmation slip

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Operations list, only the second operation 0020 of your
production order will be displayed.
Select the operation and choose the Printing of Shop Floor Papers icon.
Finally, Exit mass processing.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the first window, Refresh the List of Spool Requests again.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 189

Unit 4: Availibility Checks, Capacity Planning, Order Release and Printing

Choose the SAPscript (OTF) icon to display the new shop floor paper.
Interpret the result.
a) The confirmation slip for operation 0020 has been printed as a duplicate.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 190

 Unit 5
Exercise 20
Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements
App and with the Picking List

Business Scenario
In this scenario, we assume that all material components are already available at the issue
storage location.
You post goods issues for production orders with the goods movement app and with the
picking list.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movement App

You post goods issues with the goods movement app in different scenarios and check the
result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to check
the current situation for your product T-FSP1##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue or Enter and check the current situation. Several production orders are
displayed for material T-FSP1##.
Also check the situation for the material components.
Choose Show Overview Tree, and then choose the Order Report icon. Confirm an
corresponding information message with Continue. In the overview tree, you now can
navigate to the stock/requirements lists of the components.
You find corresponding reservations for the material components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##
and T-RSP1##.

2. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##. Note the number of the
first production order in the list:
>

Display the production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 191

Unit 5: Order Execution

Double-click the order number. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, choose
the Display Element icon.
In the Production Process Order Display: Header screen, choose the Assignment tab and
note the number of the reservation:
>

Choose Components to navigate to the component overview.

Double-click the item number of the first component T-SSP1## and note the following
detailed information:
Field Value

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

3. Display the stock/requirements list for material component T-SSP1##.

Note the current stock and the requirements quantity of the first reservation in the list:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock

OrdRes

Display details for the first reservation in the list.

Double-click the first reservation. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, note the
following information:
Field Value

Reservation

Requirement qty

ProdOrder

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Post Goods Movement tile to post a goods issue
for material component T-SSP1## Frame.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 192

 Exercise 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

A new tab will be opened. Choose Goods Issue for Reservation, and enter the reservation
number and the item number 0001:
Goods Issue Reservation Reservation number 0001

Change the proposed quantity from 20 to 11:

Mat. Short Text Qty in UnE

Frame 11

Set the OK flag and Check and Post the goods issue.
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

5. Refresh the stock/requirements list for material component T-SSP1##.

Note the current stock and the requirements quantity of the first reservation in the list:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock

OrdRes

Interpret the result.

6. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##.

Display the first production order and navigate to the component overview.
For component T-SSP1##, note the following detailed information:
Field Value

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

Navigate back to the component overview.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 193

Unit 5: Order Execution

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

7. In the Goods Issue tab, post another goods issue for material component T-SSP1##
Frame.
Again, choose Goods Issue for Reservation, and enter the reservation number and the item
number 0001:
Goods Issue Reservation Reservation number 0001

Accept the proposed quantity of 9.

Set the OK flag and Check and Post the goods issue.
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

8. Display and Refresh the stock/requirements list for material component T-SSP1##.
Interpret the result.

9. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##.

Display the first production order and navigate to the component overview.
For component T-SSP1##, note the following detailed information:
Field Value

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Navigate back to the component overview.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 194

 Exercise 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

>

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

10. In the Goods Issue tab, try to post another goods issue for material component T-SSP1##
Frame.
Again, choose Goods Issue for Reservation, and enter the reservation number and the item
number 0001:
Goods Issue Reservation Reservation number 0001

A message will be displayed. Is it possible to post goods issues for the reservation?

11. In the Goods Issue tab, choose More → Settings → Default Values.
Set the Propose All Items flag and Adopt the setting.
Now try to post another goods issue for material component T-SSP1## Frame again.
Enter a quantity of 1.
Set the OK flag and Check and Post the goods issue.
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

12. In the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##, display the first production
order and navigate to the component overview.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 195

Unit 5: Order Execution

For component T-SSP1##, note the following detailed information:

Field Value

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

>

>

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

13. Now you would be in the situation that you would have to post an unplanned goods issue
to the order. You post a goods receipt for a material that is not entered as a component in
the order and for which no reservation exists.
In the Goods Issue tab, enter the following header data:
Goods Issue Other GI for order 261

Then enter the following item:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 196

 Exercise 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

Mat. Short Text Qty in UnE SLoc Order

T-S1## 1 101B Order number

(for plant 1010)

Set the OK flag and Check and Post the goods issue.
Close the Goods Issue tab.

14. In the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##, display the first production
order.
Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

>

>

>

Navigate back.
Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

T-S1##

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Task 2: Post Goods Issues with the Picking List

You post goods issues for production orders using the picking list.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Pick Components for Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen of the Picking List, enter the following data:
Field Value

Profile 000002

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 197

Unit 5: Order Execution

Field Value

Production order Number of the production order from the

previous task

Choose Execute.
In the Order Information System: Detail List of Components screen, note the components
still open:
Order Material Requirement quanti- Quantity withdrawn
ty

>

>

2. Select the components and choose Picking.

In the Picking List, select all components and choose Post to post the goods issues.
Refresh the list. The components should have disappeared.
Navigate back to the initial screen.
Don’t close the initial screen of the picking list.

Note:
Don’t close the initial screen of the picking list.

3. In the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##, display the first production
order and navigate to the component overview.
For the components T-SSP2## and T-RSP1, note the following detailed information:
Field Value T-SSP2## Value T-RSP1##

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

>

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 198

 Exercise 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

>

>

Navigate back. o the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

T-S1##

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

4. In the initial screen of the Picking List, enter the following data:
Field Value

Profile 000002

Production Supervisor P##

Choose Execute.
In the Order Information System: Detail List of Components screen, you find all the
components for your production orders that are still open:
Select all components and choose Picking.
In the Picking List, select all components and choose Post to post the goods issues.
Refresh the list. All components should have disappeared.
Finally, close the picking list.

5. Display and Refresh the stock/requirements lists for the components T-SSP1##, T-
SSP2## and T-RSP1##.
Describe and interpret the result.
Finally, close the stock/requirements list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 199

 Unit 5
Solution 20
Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements
App and with the Picking List

Business Scenario
In this scenario, we assume that all material components are already available at the issue
storage location.
You post goods issues for production orders with the goods movement app and with the
picking list.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movement App

You post goods issues with the goods movement app in different scenarios and check the
result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to check
the current situation for your product T-FSP1##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue or Enter and check the current situation. Several production orders are
displayed for material T-FSP1##.
Also check the situation for the material components.
Choose Show Overview Tree, and then choose the Order Report icon. Confirm an
corresponding information message with Continue. In the overview tree, you now can
navigate to the stock/requirements lists of the components.
You find corresponding reservations for the material components T-SSP1##, T-SSP2##
and T-RSP1##.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##. Note the number of the
first production order in the list:
>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 200

 Solution 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

Display the production order.

Double-click the order number. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, choose
the Display Element icon.
In the Production Process Order Display: Header screen, choose the Assignment tab and
note the number of the reservation:
>

Choose Components to navigate to the component overview.

Double-click the item number of the first component T-SSP1## and note the following
detailed information:
Field Value

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following detailed information:
Field Value

Requirement Qty 20

Committed Qty 20

Withdrawal Qty 0

Final issue

3. Display the stock/requirements list for material component T-SSP1##.

Note the current stock and the requirements quantity of the first reservation in the list:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock

OrdRes

Display details for the first reservation in the list.

Double-click the first reservation. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, note the
following information:
Field Value

Reservation

Requirement qty

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 201

Unit 5: Order Execution

Field Value

ProdOrder

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following situation:

MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock Current Stock

OrdRes 20– Current Stock — 20

Field Value

Reservation Reservation number for 0001

the first production order
Requirement qty 20 PC

ProdOrder <Number of the first production order>

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Post Goods Movement tile to post a goods issue
for material component T-SSP1## Frame.
A new tab will be opened. Choose Goods Issue for Reservation, and enter the reservation
number and the item number 0001:
Goods Issue Reservation Reservation number 0001

Change the proposed quantity from 20 to 11:

Mat. Short Text Qty in UnE

Frame 11

Set the OK flag and Check and Post the goods issue.
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. Refresh the stock/requirements list for material component T-SSP1##.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 202

 Solution 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

Note the current stock and the requirements quantity of the first reservation in the list:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock

OrdRes

Interpret the result.

a) You should find the following situation:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock Current Stock =

Previous stock –11

OrdRes 9– Current Stock – 9

The stock and the requirements quantity were reduced accordingly by the goods issue
posting.

6. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##.

Display the first production order and navigate to the component overview.
For component T-SSP1##, note the following detailed information:
Field Value

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 203

Unit 5: Order Execution

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following information:

Field Value

Requirement Qty 20

Committed Qty 20

Withdrawal Qty 11

Final issue

Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

Order T-SSP1## 1 Number of material document

number
Planned goods issue

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1## 0 0

T-SSP1## 71,50 11

T-SSP2## 0 0

7. In the Goods Issue tab, post another goods issue for material component T-SSP1##
Frame.
Again, choose Goods Issue for Reservation, and enter the reservation number and the item
number 0001:
Goods Issue Reservation Reservation number 0001

Accept the proposed quantity of 9.

Set the OK flag and Check and Post the goods issue.
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 204

 Solution 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

8. Display and Refresh the stock/requirements list for material component T-SSP1##.
Interpret the result.
a) The reservation has disappeared. The stock was reduced accordingly.

9. Display the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##.

Display the first production order and navigate to the component overview.
For component T-SSP1##, note the following detailed information:
Field Value

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

>

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 205

Unit 5: Order Execution

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following information:

Field Value

Requirement Qty 20

Committed Qty 20

Withdrawal Qty 20

Final issue X

Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

Order number T-SSP1## 1 Number of material

document
Planned goods is-
sue

Number of material
document

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1## 0 0

T-SSP1## 130 20

T-SSP2## 0 0

10. In the Goods Issue tab, try to post another goods issue for material component T-SSP1##
Frame.
Again, choose Goods Issue for Reservation, and enter the reservation number and the item
number 0001:
Goods Issue Reservation Reservation number 0001

A message will be displayed. Is it possible to post goods issues for the reservation?
a) The following message will be displayed: Document does not contain any
selectable items. Goods issues cannot be posted.

11. In the Goods Issue tab, choose More → Settings → Default Values.
Set the Propose All Items flag and Adopt the setting.
Now try to post another goods issue for material component T-SSP1## Frame again.
Enter a quantity of 1.
Set the OK flag and Check and Post the goods issue.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 206

 Solution 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Issue tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

12. In the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##, display the first production
order and navigate to the component overview.
For component T-SSP1##, note the following detailed information:
Field Value

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

>

>

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 207

Unit 5: Order Execution

a) You should find the following information:

Field Value

Requirement Qty 20

Committed Qty 20

Withdrawal Qty 21

Final issue X

Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

Order number T-SSP1## 1 Number of material

document
Planned goods is-
sue

Number of material
document

Number of material
document

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1## 0 0

T-SSP1## 136,5 21

T-SSP2## 0 0

13. Now you would be in the situation that you would have to post an unplanned goods issue
to the order. You post a goods receipt for a material that is not entered as a component in
the order and for which no reservation exists.
In the Goods Issue tab, enter the following header data:
Goods Issue Other GI for order 261

Then enter the following item:

Mat. Short Text Qty in UnE SLoc Order

T-S1## 1 101B Order number

(for plant 1010)

Set the OK flag and Check and Post the goods issue.
Close the Goods Issue tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 208

 Solution 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

14. In the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##, display the first production
order.
Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

>

>

>

Navigate back.
Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

T-S1##

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following information:

Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

Order number T-SSP1## 1 Number of material

document
Planned goods is-
sue

Number of material
document

Number of material
document

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 209

Unit 5: Order Execution

Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

T-S1## 2
Unplanned goods
issue

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1## 0 0

T-SSP1## 136,50 21

T-S1## 20,39 1

T-SSP2## 0 0

Task 2: Post Goods Issues with the Picking List

You post goods issues for production orders using the picking list.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Pick Components for Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen of the Picking List, enter the following data:
Field Value

Profile 000002

Production order Number of the production order from the

previous task

Choose Execute.
In the Order Information System: Detail List of Components screen, note the components
still open:
Order Material Requirement quanti- Quantity withdrawn
ty

>

>

a) You should find the following open components for your production order:
Order Material Requirement quan- Quantity withdrawn
tity

Order number T-RSP1## 20 0

T-SSP2## 40 0

2. Select the components and choose Picking.

In the Picking List, select all components and choose Post to post the goods issues.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 210

 Solution 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

Refresh the list. The components should have disappeared.

Navigate back to the initial screen.
Don’t close the initial screen of the picking list.

Note:
Don’t close the initial screen of the picking list.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the stock/requirements list for your product T-FSP1##, display the first production
order and navigate to the component overview.
For the components T-SSP2## and T-RSP1, note the following detailed information:
Field Value T-SSP2## Value T-RSP1##

Requirement Qty

Committed Qty

Withdrawal Qty

Final issue

Navigate back to the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and note the current
information:
Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

>

>

>

>

>

>

Navigate back. o the component overview.

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1##

T-SSP1##

T-S1##

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 211

Unit 5: Order Execution

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

T-SSP2##

Finally, navigate Back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following information:

Field Value T-SSP2## Value T-RSP1##

Requirement Qty 40 20

Committed Qty 40 20

Withdrawal Qty 40 20

Final issue X X

Order Material Goods mvmt Mat. Doc.

Order T-RSP1## 1 Number of material document

number
Planned goods issue

T-SSP1## Number of material document

Number of material document

Number of material document

T-SSP2## Number of material document

T-S1## 2 Number of material document

Unplanned goods is-
sue

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Issues T-RSP1## 33,00 20

T-SSP1## 136,50 21

T-S1## 20,39 1

T-SSP2## 274,00 40

4. In the initial screen of the Picking List, enter the following data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 212

 Solution 20: Post Goods Issues with the Goods Movements App and with the Picking List

Field Value

Profile 000002

Production Supervisor P##

Choose Execute.
In the Order Information System: Detail List of Components screen, you find all the
components for your production orders that are still open:
Select all components and choose Picking.
In the Picking List, select all components and choose Post to post the goods issues.
Refresh the list. All components should have disappeared.
Finally, close the picking list.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. Display and Refresh the stock/requirements lists for the components T-SSP1##, T-
SSP2## and T-RSP1##.
Describe and interpret the result.
Finally, close the stock/requirements list.
a) All reservations have disappeared. The stocks were reduced accordingly.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 213

 Unit 5
Exercise 21
Stage Materials with the Pull List

Business Scenario
Issue storage locations in production must be regularly supplied with the quantities of
material required in a certain period of time. Corresponding stock transfers from
replenishment storage locations must be carried out for this purpose.
You can use the pull list to prepare and carry out these stock transfers.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Production Order and Check the Availability of the Components
Create a production order for the semi-finished material T-SSP1## and perform a material
availability check.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for your semi-finished product T-SSP1##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-SSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:
Field Value

Total Qty 10

Basic Dates / Start choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to create the order.

Save the order and note the order number:
>

Close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 214

 Exercise 21: Stage Materials with the Pull List

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for your semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
In the Mange Production Orders screen, choose Adapt Filters.
In the Material section of the Adapt Filters screen, choose More Filters.
In the Select Filters dialog box, select filter Material and choose OK.
In the Adapt Filters screen, enter material number T-SSP1## and choose Save.
In the Save Variant dialog box, enter
Field Value

Name Variant for T-SSP1##

and choose OK.

In the Adapt Filters screen, choose Go.
Finally, in the Mange Production Orders screen, only the production order for material T-
SSP1## will be displayed.

3. Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.
In the detail screen, choose Components and note the following information on the
components:
Material Quantity Coverage Requirement Storage Loca-
Date/Time tion

>

>

>

4. Choose Edit Order to change the production order.

A new tab with the title Production order Change: Header will be opened.
Choose the Material (Check Material Availability) button.
The Availability Check dialog box will be opened, and the following message will be
displayed: Non-Availability of Material for order.
Display the Missing Parts List. What materials are missing?
Exit the list, Save the order and Close the tab.

5. Refresh (F5) the Mange Production Orders screen and choose Issues.
The following message is displayed: Components Missing: T-RSP5## + 1 More.
Click on the message to display the missing components. Note the missing components:
Material Quantity Coverage Storage Location

>

>

Finally, choose Home to close the app.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 215

Unit 5: Order Execution

Task 2: Perform Stock Transfers using the Pull List

For the production order of your semi-finished product T-SSP1##, you have to perform stock
transfers for the components T-RSP5## and T-RSP6## from a replenishment storage
location to the issue storage location 101B.
The pull list checks the stock situation at the issue storage location, calculates the quantities
of missing parts, and creates replenishment elements for these missing parts.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock (Single Material) tile to check the stocks of
your material components T-RSP5##, T-RSP6##, and T-SSP3##.
In the Stock - Single Material screen, enter the material numbers in the field Material.
Note the actual situation for each material in the following tables:
T-RSP5##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

>
>
>

T-RSP6##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

>
>
>

T-SSP3##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

>
>

For which materials do you have to post a stock transfer to the issue storage location
101B? Which storage location could be used as replenishment storage location?
Finally, choose Home to close the app.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stage Materials for Production tile to post stock
transfers for the components T-RSP5## and T-RSP6##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data:
Field Value

SLoc Level X

Plant 1010

Selection Horizon for Reqmts > Requirements date as noted before

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 216

 Exercise 21: Stage Materials with the Pull List

Now choose the Production/Process Orders view.

In the Components subscreen, choose the Multiple selection icon for the Material field.
In the Select Single Values view, enter the following data:
Single Value

T-RSP5##

T-RSP6##

Copy the entries.

Choose the button Global Settings. In the Dialog Control, enter the following data:
Dialog steps

Automatic Create replenishment proposals

Automatic Execute batch/stock determination

Choose Continue to close the Global Settings.

In the Material Staging for Production: Production / Process Order screen, choose Execute.
In the following Pull List: Storage Location Level screen, you can check the replenishment
proposals. Note the replenishment elements in the following table:
RepElm Material Issue stor. loca- RepLoc Quantity staged
tion

>
>

Select all lines in the subscreen Replen. Elements and choose Stage
Save the data and Close the tab.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock (Single Material) tile to check the result of
your stock transfers for the material components T-RSP5## and T-RSP6##.
Are there stocks in storage location 101B?
Finally, choose Home to close the tab.

Task 3: Check the Availability of the Components

Display your production order for the semi-finished material T-SSP1## and perform a
material availability check again.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for your semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
Click on the Select Variant icon in the left upper corner and choose your Variant for T-
SSP1##.
Only the production order for material T-SSP1## will be displayed.
Note the component issue.

2. Select the order and choose Edit to change the production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 217

Unit 5: Order Execution

A new tab with the title Production order Change: Header will be opened.
Choose the Material (Check Material Availability) button.
The following message will be displayed: All checked materials in order are available.
Save the order and Close the tab.

3. Refresh (F5) the Mange Production Orders screen.

The component issue is no longer displayed.
Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.
In the detail screen, choose Components and note the following information on the
components:
Material Quantity Coverage Requirement Storage Loca-
Date/Time tion

>

>

>

Finally, choose Home to close the app.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 218

 Unit 5
Solution 21
Stage Materials with the Pull List

Business Scenario
Issue storage locations in production must be regularly supplied with the quantities of
material required in a certain period of time. Corresponding stock transfers from
replenishment storage locations must be carried out for this purpose.
You can use the pull list to prepare and carry out these stock transfers.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Production Order and Check the Availability of the Components
Create a production order for the semi-finished material T-SSP1## and perform a material
availability check.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for your semi-finished product T-SSP1##.
A new tab with the title Production Order Create: Initial Screen will be opened.
Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-SSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type PO##

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:
Field Value

Total Qty 10

Basic Dates / Start choose any date in the near future

Choose Enter to create the order.

Save the order and note the order number:
>

Close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 219

Unit 5: Order Execution

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise. When you save the order, the order
number is displayed in a message at the bottom of the screen.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for your semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
In the Mange Production Orders screen, choose Adapt Filters.
In the Material section of the Adapt Filters screen, choose More Filters.
In the Select Filters dialog box, select filter Material and choose OK.
In the Adapt Filters screen, enter material number T-SSP1## and choose Save.
In the Save Variant dialog box, enter
Field Value

Name Variant for T-SSP1##

and choose OK.

In the Adapt Filters screen, choose Go.
Finally, in the Mange Production Orders screen, only the production order for material T-
SSP1## will be displayed.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.
In the detail screen, choose Components and note the following information on the
components:
Material Quantity Coverage Requirement Storage Loca-
Date/Time tion

>

>

>

a) You find the following information:

Material Quantity Coverage Requirement Storage Loca-
Date/Time tion

T-RSP5## 10 PC 10 PC Uncov- Requ. date 101B

ered
T-RSP6## 10 PC 10 PC Uncov- Requ. date 101B
ered
T-SSP3## 1000 L 1000 L Uncov- Requ. date 101B
ered

4. Choose Edit Order to change the production order.

A new tab with the title Production order Change: Header will be opened.
Choose the Material (Check Material Availability) button.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 220

 Solution 21: Stage Materials with the Pull List

The Availability Check dialog box will be opened, and the following message will be
displayed: Non-Availability of Material for order.
Display the Missing Parts List. What materials are missing?
Exit the list, Save the order and Close the tab.
a) The material components T-RSP5## and T-RSP6## are missing in storage location
101B.

5. Refresh (F5) the Mange Production Orders screen and choose Issues.
The following message is displayed: Components Missing: T-RSP5## + 1 More.
Click on the message to display the missing components. Note the missing components:
Material Quantity Coverage Storage Location

>

>

Finally, choose Home to close the app.

a) You find the following missing components:
Material Quantity Coverage Storage Location

T-RSP5## 10 PC 10 PC Uncovered 101B

T-RSP6## 10 PC 10 PC Uncovered 101B

Task 2: Perform Stock Transfers using the Pull List

For the production order of your semi-finished product T-SSP1##, you have to perform stock
transfers for the components T-RSP5## and T-RSP6## from a replenishment storage
location to the issue storage location 101B.
The pull list checks the stock situation at the issue storage location, calculates the quantities
of missing parts, and creates replenishment elements for these missing parts.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock (Single Material) tile to check the stocks of
your material components T-RSP5##, T-RSP6##, and T-SSP3##.
In the Stock - Single Material screen, enter the material numbers in the field Material.
Note the actual situation for each material in the following tables:
T-RSP5##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

>
>
>

T-RSP6##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 221

Unit 5: Order Execution

Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

>
>

T-SSP3##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

>
>

For which materials do you have to post a stock transfer to the issue storage location
101B? Which storage location could be used as replenishment storage location?
Finally, choose Home to close the app.
a) You should find the following stocks:
T-RSP5##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

1010 100
101B 0
101C 100

T-RSP6##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

1010 100
101B 0
101C 100

T-SSP3##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

1010 100
101B 100

Stock transfers to issue storage location 101B have to be posted for the materials T-
RSP5## and T-RSP6##. Storage location 101C can be used as replenishment storage
location.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stage Materials for Production tile to post stock
transfers for the components T-RSP5## and T-RSP6##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 222

 Solution 21: Stage Materials with the Pull List

Field Value

SLoc Level X

Plant 1010

Selection Horizon for Reqmts > Requirements date as noted before

Now choose the Production/Process Orders view.

In the Components subscreen, choose the Multiple selection icon for the Material field.
In the Select Single Values view, enter the following data:
Single Value

T-RSP5##

T-RSP6##

Copy the entries.

Choose the button Global Settings. In the Dialog Control, enter the following data:
Dialog steps

Automatic Create replenishment proposals

Automatic Execute batch/stock determination

Choose Continue to close the Global Settings.

In the Material Staging for Production: Production / Process Order screen, choose Execute.
In the following Pull List: Storage Location Level screen, you can check the replenishment
proposals. Note the replenishment elements in the following table:
RepElm Material Issue stor. loca- RepLoc Quantity staged
tion

>
>

Select all lines in the subscreen Replen. Elements and choose Stage
Save the data and Close the tab.
a) In the pull list, you should find the following replenishment elements.
RepElm Material Issue stor. loca- RepLoc Quantity stag-
tion ed

StkTrn T-RSP5## 101B 101C 10

StkTrn T-RSP6## 101B 101C 10

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 223

Unit 5: Order Execution

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Stock (Single Material) tile to check the result of
your stock transfers for the material components T-RSP5## and T-RSP6##.
Are there stocks in storage location 101B?
Finally, choose Home to close the tab.
a) As a result of the stock transfers with the pull list, there are stocks in storage location
101B.
You should find the following stocks:
T-RSP5##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

1010 100

101B 10

101C 90

T-RSP6##
Plant Storage Location Unrestricted-Use Stock

1010 100

101B 10

101C 90

Task 3: Check the Availability of the Components

Display your production order for the semi-finished material T-SSP1## and perform a
material availability check again.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for your semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
Click on the Select Variant icon in the left upper corner and choose your Variant for T-
SSP1##.
Only the production order for material T-SSP1## will be displayed.
Note the component issue.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Select the order and choose Edit to change the production order.
A new tab with the title Production order Change: Header will be opened.
Choose the Material (Check Material Availability) button.
The following message will be displayed: All checked materials in order are available.
Save the order and Close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. Refresh (F5) the Mange Production Orders screen.

The component issue is no longer displayed.
Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 224

 Solution 21: Stage Materials with the Pull List

In the detail screen, choose Components and note the following information on the
components:
Material Quantity Coverage Requirement Storage Loca-
Date/Time tion

>

>

>

Finally, choose Home to close the app.

a) You find the following information:
Material Quantity Coverage Requirement Storage Loca-
Date/Time tion

T-RSP5## 10 PC 10 PC Commit- Requ. date 101B

ted

T-RSP6## 10 PC 10 PC Commit- Requ. date 101B

ted

T-SSP3## 1000 L 1000 L Com- Requ. date 101B

mitted

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 225

 Unit 5
Exercise 22
Post Goods Issues via Backflushing

Business Scenario
Often you do not want to stage material components for specific orders, but, for example, use
the pull list to regularly supply the issue storage locations with the component quantities
required in a certain period of time.
In such cases goods issues can be posted automatically via backflushing when an operation
or an order is confirmed.
You can define the settings for backflushing in the material master of a component, in a work
center, or in the component allocation view of a routing.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Check the Setting for Backflushing in the Material Masters of the Components
For the orders to produce semi-finished material T-SSP1##, the goods issues for the material
components should be posted automatically via backflushing.
Check if the material masters of the components are set appropriately.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Material tile to check the setting for
backflushing for the material components T-RSP5##, T-RSP6## and T-SSP3##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the corresponding material number in the initial screen,
then choose view MRP 2 for plant 1010.
In the MRP 2 view, note the following setting for each material:
Field Value for T- Value for T-RSP6## Value for T-SSP3##
RSP5##

Backflush

Task 2: Post the Goods Issues via Backflushing

First check whether the material components of your production order for material T-SSP1##
will be backflushed.
Then carry out a confirmation to trigger the backflushing of the components.
Finally, check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for your semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
Click on the Select Variant icon in the left upper corner and choose your Variant for T-
SSP1##.
Only the production order for material T-SSP1## will be displayed.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 226

 Exercise 22: Post Goods Issues via Backflushing

2. Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.
In the detail screen, choose Components and note the following information on the
components:
Material Open Quantity Coverage Backflush

>

>

>

3. Now choose Order Schedule and click in the line of the first operation to navigate to the
Manage Production Operations view.
Choose Release to release the operation, then choose Confirm Operation.
A new tab with the title Enter Time Ticket for Production Order will be opened.
Choose the Goods Movements button to check, whether the material components to be
backflushed are assigned to the confirmation.
Are the components T-RSP5##, T-RSP6## and T-SSP3## listed in the Goods Movement
Overview of the confirmation?
Post the confirmation.
The following message should be displayed: Confirmation saved (Goods movements: 3,
failed: 0).
Finally, close the tab.

4. Refresh the Manage Production Operations tab and choose Components.

Note the following information on the components:
Material Open Quantity Coverage Backflush

>

>

>

Finally, choose Home to close the app.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 227

 Unit 5
Solution 22
Post Goods Issues via Backflushing

Business Scenario
Often you do not want to stage material components for specific orders, but, for example, use
the pull list to regularly supply the issue storage locations with the component quantities
required in a certain period of time.
In such cases goods issues can be posted automatically via backflushing when an operation
or an order is confirmed.
You can define the settings for backflushing in the material master of a component, in a work
center, or in the component allocation view of a routing.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Check the Setting for Backflushing in the Material Masters of the Components
For the orders to produce semi-finished material T-SSP1##, the goods issues for the material
components should be posted automatically via backflushing.
Check if the material masters of the components are set appropriately.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Material tile to check the setting for
backflushing for the material components T-RSP5##, T-RSP6## and T-SSP3##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the corresponding material number in the initial screen,
then choose view MRP 2 for plant 1010.
In the MRP 2 view, note the following setting for each material:
Field Value for T- Value for T-RSP6## Value for T-SSP3##
RSP5##

Backflush

a) The setting for the Backflush field is as follows.

Field Value for T- Value for T-RSP6## Value for T-SSP3##
RSP5##

Backflush 1 Always Back- 1 Always Backflush 1 Always Backflush

flush

Task 2: Post the Goods Issues via Backflushing

First check whether the material components of your production order for material T-SSP1##
will be backflushed.
Then carry out a confirmation to trigger the backflushing of the components.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 228

 Solution 22: Post Goods Issues via Backflushing

Finally, check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for your semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
Click on the Select Variant icon in the left upper corner and choose your Variant for T-
SSP1##.
Only the production order for material T-SSP1## will be displayed.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.
In the detail screen, choose Components and note the following information on the
components:
Material Open Quantity Coverage Backflush

>

>

>

a) You find the following information:

Material Open Quantity Coverage Backflush

T-RSP5## 10 PC 10 PC Committed Yes

T-RSP6## 10 PC 10 PC Committed Yes

T-SSP3## 1000 L 1000 L Committed Yes

3. Now choose Order Schedule and click in the line of the first operation to navigate to the
Manage Production Operations view.
Choose Release to release the operation, then choose Confirm Operation.
A new tab with the title Enter Time Ticket for Production Order will be opened.
Choose the Goods Movements button to check, whether the material components to be
backflushed are assigned to the confirmation.
Are the components T-RSP5##, T-RSP6## and T-SSP3## listed in the Goods Movement
Overview of the confirmation?
Post the confirmation.
The following message should be displayed: Confirmation saved (Goods movements: 3,
failed: 0).
Finally, close the tab.
a) The components T-RSP5##, T-RSP6## and T-SSP3## should be listed in the Goods
Movement Overview of the confirmation.

4. Refresh the Manage Production Operations tab and choose Components.

Note the following information on the components:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 229

Unit 5: Order Execution

Material Open Quantity Coverage Backflush

>

>

>

Finally, choose Home to close the app.

a) You find the following information:
Material Open Quantity Coverage Backflash

T-RSP5## 0 10 PC Consumed Yes

T-RSP6## 0 10 PC Consumed Yes

T-SSP3## 0 1000 L Consumed Yes

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 230

 Unit 5
Exercise 23
Stage Materials with KANBAN

Business Scenario
You intend to organize material staging more effectively in some areas of production. You
decide to use Kanban for this purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create Master Data for Kanban

You create the master data necessary for Kanban. These are production supply areas and
control cycles.

1. With Kanban, material is staged in production supply areas directly in production.

Therefore, you have to create production supply areas in the system.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Fast Entry Supply Area tile to create a production
supply area.
A new tab will be opened. In the Determine Work Area: Entry window, enter plant 1010 as
work area.
In the Change View Supply Area Fast Data Entry: Overview screen, choose New Entries and
enter the following data:
Field Value

Supply Area PSA##

SLoc 101B

Res P##

Production Supply Area Name Production Supply Area ##

Save your entries and Close the tab.

2. The relationships between production supply areas and the supply sources are defined in
control cycles. You create a control cycle for the staging of material T-RSP7## Rim with
Spokes to production supply area PSA##. You define as replenishment strategy a stock
transfer from replenishment storage location 101C.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Kanban Control Cycle tile to create a
control cycle.
A new tab will be opened. Enter plant 1010 in the Selection sub screen, and choose
Display/Change.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 231

Unit 5: Order Execution

Then choose the Create Control Cycle icon.

In the Create Control Cycle window, enter the following data:
Field Value

Classic KANBAN X

Material T-RSP7##

Plant 1010

Prodn Supply Area PSA##

Choose Continue.
In the Kanbans sub screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

No. of Kanbans 5

Container Qty 10

In the Replenishment Strategy tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Stock transfer 0001

Stor. location 101C

Choose OK, then Save Control Cycle. Finally, Close the tab.

Task 2: Trigger Material Replenishment

Material that is required on a regular basis is kept available in small quantities in production.
With Kanban, the replenishment of a material is only triggered when a certain quantity of the
material has been consumed. This replenishment is triggered directly by production based on
the previously maintained master data.
You trigger the replenishment of material T-RSP7## based on the corresponding control
cycle, and you check the results at different times during the Kanban process.

1. Check the actual stock of material T-RSP7##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Stock Overview tile to check the actual
stock of material T-RSP7##.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Material T-RSP7##

Plant 1010

Choose Execute.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 232

 Exercise 23: Stage Materials with KANBAN

In the Stock Overview: Basic List, note the current situation:

Plant / Storage Location Unrestricted use Reserved

1010

> 101C

Don’t close the stock overview.

Note:
Don’t close the stock overview.

2. You can use the Kanban board to monitor and control the replenishment. You control the
replenishment process by setting a Kanban to the appropriate status. When the material
in a Kanban has been used up, you set the Kanban status to empty which automatically
triggers the replenishment process. The source of supply receives the signal to fill up the
Kanban. In our business scenario, we use a control cycle with the replenishment strategy
stock transfer with reservations.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Kanbans: Demand View tile to display the
Kanban board.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Plant 1010

Production Supply Area PSA##

Choose Continue.
In the Kanban board, check and note the current situation:
CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

>

>

>

>

>

3. Select the line of a Kanban and choose Set to Empty.

Check and note the new situation:
CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

>

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 233

Unit 5: Order Execution

CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

>

>

>

Has the status of the corresponding Kanban been changed?

4. Select the line of the empty Kanban and choose More → Goto → Kanban Information or
double-click the empty Kanban.
In the Kanban Information screen, note the following information:
Field Value

Qty Requested

Replen. Strategy

Reservatn

You can choose Replenishment to display the reservation. Then navigate Back to the
Kanban Information screen.
Choose Continue (Enter) to close the Kanban Information screen.
Don’t close the Kanban Board.

Note:
Don’t close the Kanban Board.

5. Now check the actual stock of material T-RSP7## again.

In the Stock Overview tab, Refresh the list and note the current situation:
Plant / Storage Lo- Unrestricted use Reserved Rcpt reservation
cation

1010

> 101B

> 101C

Don’t close the stock overview.

Note:
Don’t close the stock overview.

6. Find and display the reservation for material T-RSP7## via the reservation list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 234

 Exercise 23: Stage Materials with KANBAN

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Reservation list tile to display the
reservation for material T-RSP7##.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Material T-RSP7##

Plant 1010

Choose Execute.
The reservation of your material T-RSP7## is listed.
You can choose Reservation to display the reservation.
Finally, close the tab.

7. In the replenishment storage location 101C, a responsible person has filled up the empty
container with the requested quantity.
When you receive the full Kanban at the production supply area, you set the Kanban status
to full, which triggers the goods receipt posting for material T-RSP7## into the storage
location 101B of the production supply area.
In the Kanban Board tab, select the line of the empty Kanban and choose Set to Full.
Check and note the new situation:
CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

>

>

>

>

>

Has the status of the corresponding Kanban been changed?

8. Select the line of the full Kanban and choose More → Goto → Kanban Information or
double-click the full Kanban.
In the Kanban Information screen, note the following information:
Field Value

Actual Quantity

GR Quantity

Choose Replenishment to display the reservation, and note the following information:
Field Value

Withdrawal QTY

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 235

Unit 5: Order Execution

Field Value

Item Completed

Navigate Back to the Kanban Information screen.

Choose Continue (Enter) to close the Kanban Information screen.
Finally, Close the Kanban Board tab.

9. Finally, display the actual stock of material T-RSP7## again to check the result of the
goods receipt posting triggered by the Kanban process.
In the Stock Overview tab, Refresh the list and note the current situation:
Plant / Storage Location Unrestricted use Reserved

1010

> 101B

> 101C

Describe the result of the goods receipt posting triggered by the Kanban process.
Finally, Close the Stock Overview tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 236

 Unit 5
Solution 23
Stage Materials with KANBAN

Business Scenario
You intend to organize material staging more effectively in some areas of production. You
decide to use Kanban for this purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create Master Data for Kanban

You create the master data necessary for Kanban. These are production supply areas and
control cycles.

1. With Kanban, material is staged in production supply areas directly in production.

Therefore, you have to create production supply areas in the system.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Fast Entry Supply Area tile to create a production
supply area.
A new tab will be opened. In the Determine Work Area: Entry window, enter plant 1010 as
work area.
In the Change View Supply Area Fast Data Entry: Overview screen, choose New Entries and
enter the following data:
Field Value

Supply Area PSA##

SLoc 101B

Res P##

Production Supply Area Name Production Supply Area ##

Save your entries and Close the tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. The relationships between production supply areas and the supply sources are defined in
control cycles. You create a control cycle for the staging of material T-RSP7## Rim with
Spokes to production supply area PSA##. You define as replenishment strategy a stock
transfer from replenishment storage location 101C.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Kanban Control Cycle tile to create a
control cycle.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 237

Unit 5: Order Execution

A new tab will be opened. Enter plant 1010 in the Selection sub screen, and choose
Display/Change.
Then choose the Create Control Cycle icon.
In the Create Control Cycle window, enter the following data:
Field Value

Classic KANBAN X

Material T-RSP7##

Plant 1010

Prodn Supply Area PSA##

Choose Continue.
In the Kanbans sub screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

No. of Kanbans 5

Container Qty 10

In the Replenishment Strategy tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Stock transfer 0001

Stor. location 101C

Choose OK, then Save Control Cycle. Finally, Close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Trigger Material Replenishment

Material that is required on a regular basis is kept available in small quantities in production.
With Kanban, the replenishment of a material is only triggered when a certain quantity of the
material has been consumed. This replenishment is triggered directly by production based on
the previously maintained master data.
You trigger the replenishment of material T-RSP7## based on the corresponding control
cycle, and you check the results at different times during the Kanban process.

1. Check the actual stock of material T-RSP7##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Stock Overview tile to check the actual
stock of material T-RSP7##.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Material T-RSP7##

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 238

 Solution 23: Stage Materials with KANBAN

Field Value

Plant 1010

Choose Execute.
In the Stock Overview: Basic List, note the current situation:
Plant / Storage Location Unrestricted use Reserved

1010

> 101C

Don’t close the stock overview.

Note:
Don’t close the stock overview.

a) You should find the following situation:

Plant / Storage Location Unrestricted use Reserved

1010 2000

> 101C 2000

2. You can use the Kanban board to monitor and control the replenishment. You control the
replenishment process by setting a Kanban to the appropriate status. When the material
in a Kanban has been used up, you set the Kanban status to empty which automatically
triggers the replenishment process. The source of supply receives the signal to fill up the
Kanban. In our business scenario, we use a control cycle with the replenishment strategy
stock transfer with reservations.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Kanbans: Demand View tile to display the
Kanban board.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Plant 1010

Production Supply Area PSA##

Choose Continue.
In the Kanban board, check and note the current situation:
CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

>

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 239

Unit 5: Order Execution

CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

>

>

>

a) You should find the following situation:

CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

Number T-RSP7## PSA## 10 Number WAIT

10 Number WAIT
10 Number WAIT
10 Number WAIT
10 Number WAIT

3. Select the line of a Kanban and choose Set to Empty.

Check and note the new situation:
CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

>

>

>

>

>

Has the status of the corresponding Kanban been changed?

a) You should find the following situation:
CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

Number T-RSP7## PSA## 10 Number WAIT

10 Number WAIT
10 Number WAIT
10 Number WAIT
10 Number EMPTY

b) The corresponding Kanban has the new status EMPTY.

4. Select the line of the empty Kanban and choose More → Goto → Kanban Information or
double-click the empty Kanban.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 240

 Solution 23: Stage Materials with KANBAN

In the Kanban Information screen, note the following information:

Field Value

Qty Requested

Replen. Strategy

Reservatn

You can choose Replenishment to display the reservation. Then navigate Back to the
Kanban Information screen.
Choose Continue (Enter) to close the Kanban Information screen.
Don’t close the Kanban Board.

Note:
Don’t close the Kanban Board.

a) You should find the following information:

Field Value

Qty Requested 10

Replen. Strategy Stock transfer with reservation

Reservatn Reservation number

5. Now check the actual stock of material T-RSP7## again.

In the Stock Overview tab, Refresh the list and note the current situation:
Plant / Storage Lo- Unrestricted use Reserved Rcpt reservation
cation

1010

> 101B

> 101C

Don’t close the stock overview.

Note:
Don’t close the stock overview.

a) You should find the following situation:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 241

Unit 5: Order Execution

Plant / Storage Lo- Unrestricted use Reserved Rcpt reservation

cation

1010 2000 10 10

> 101B 10

> 101C 2000 10

6. Find and display the reservation for material T-RSP7## via the reservation list.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Reservation list tile to display the
reservation for material T-RSP7##.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Material T-RSP7##

Plant 1010

Choose Execute.
The reservation of your material T-RSP7## is listed.
You can choose Reservation to display the reservation.
Finally, close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

7. In the replenishment storage location 101C, a responsible person has filled up the empty
container with the requested quantity.
When you receive the full Kanban at the production supply area, you set the Kanban status
to full, which triggers the goods receipt posting for material T-RSP7## into the storage
location 101B of the production supply area.
In the Kanban Board tab, select the line of the empty Kanban and choose Set to Full.
Check and note the new situation:
CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

>

>

>

>

>

Has the status of the corresponding Kanban been changed?

a) You should find the following new situation:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 242

 Solution 23: Stage Materials with KANBAN

CntCycle Material SupplyArea Kanban Qty ID number Status

Number T-RSP7## PSA## 10 Number WAIT

10 Number WAIT
10 Number WAIT
10 Number WAIT
10 Number FULL

The corresponding Kanban has the new status FULL.

8. Select the line of the full Kanban and choose More → Goto → Kanban Information or
double-click the full Kanban.
In the Kanban Information screen, note the following information:
Field Value

Actual Quantity

GR Quantity

Choose Replenishment to display the reservation, and note the following information:
Field Value

Withdrawal QTY

Item Completed

Navigate Back to the Kanban Information screen.

Choose Continue (Enter) to close the Kanban Information screen.
Finally, Close the Kanban Board tab.
a) You should find the following information:
Field Value

Actual Quantity 10

GR Quantity 10

Field Value

Withdrawal QTY 10

Item Completed X

9. Finally, display the actual stock of material T-RSP7## again to check the result of the
goods receipt posting triggered by the Kanban process.
In the Stock Overview tab, Refresh the list and note the current situation:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 243

Unit 5: Order Execution

Plant / Storage Location Unrestricted use Reserved

1010

> 101B

> 101C

Describe the result of the goods receipt posting triggered by the Kanban process.
Finally, Close the Stock Overview tab.
a) You should find the following situation:
Plant / Storage Location Unrestricted use Reserved

1010 2000

> 101B 10

> 101C 1990

A stock transfer from storage location 101C to storage location 101B has been posted.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 244

 Unit 5
Exercise 24
Check the Customizing Settings for
Confirmations

Business Scenario
In Customizing, you check the confirmation parameters for your order type and a
confirmation profile for time ticket confirmations.

Note:
To successfully perform this exercise, it is required, that the exercise Analyze and
Test a User Status Profile, at least Task 1, is done.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Check the Confirmation Parameters for your Order Type

In the Customizing environment of the backend system, check the confirmation parameters
for your order type PO## in plant 1010. You already created these parameters in the exercise:
Analyze and Test a User Status Profile, Task 1, step 5.

1. Choose transaction SPRO and press the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Confirmation → Define Conformation
Parameters:
Select the following line:
Plnt Type

1010 PO##

Choose the Details icon to display the confirmation parameters in detail.

Get an overview of the settings on the various tabs.
Finally, Exit the confirmation parameters.

Task 2: Check a Confirmation Profile for Time Tickets Confirmations

In the Customizing environment of the backend system, check a confirmation profile for time
ticket confirmations.

1. In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 245

Unit 5: Order Execution

Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Confirmation → Single Screen

Entry → Define Single Screen Entry.
In the Single Screen Entry of Confirmation: Overview screen, select confirmation profile
YBPR01 and choose the Details icon.
In the Single Screen Entry of Confirmation: Details screen, in the tab Area Selection, get an
overview of the possible entries in the Header area field and in the Area fields of the Detail
areas.
Also, get an overview of the entries in the Default tab.
Choose the Preview button to preview the layout for the corresponding time ticket
confirmation.
Finally, Exit the single screen entry.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 246

 Unit 5
Solution 24
Check the Customizing Settings for
Confirmations

Business Scenario
In Customizing, you check the confirmation parameters for your order type and a
confirmation profile for time ticket confirmations.

Note:
To successfully perform this exercise, it is required, that the exercise Analyze and
Test a User Status Profile, at least Task 1, is done.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Check the Confirmation Parameters for your Order Type

In the Customizing environment of the backend system, check the confirmation parameters
for your order type PO## in plant 1010. You already created these parameters in the exercise:
Analyze and Test a User Status Profile, Task 1, step 5.

1. Choose transaction SPRO and press the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Confirmation → Define Conformation
Parameters:
Select the following line:
Plnt Type

1010 PO##

Choose the Details icon to display the confirmation parameters in detail.

Get an overview of the settings on the various tabs.
Finally, Exit the confirmation parameters.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Check a Confirmation Profile for Time Tickets Confirmations

In the Customizing environment of the backend system, check a confirmation profile for time
ticket confirmations.

1. In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 247

Unit 5: Order Execution

Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Confirmation → Single Screen

Entry → Define Single Screen Entry.
In the Single Screen Entry of Confirmation: Overview screen, select confirmation profile
YBPR01 and choose the Details icon.
In the Single Screen Entry of Confirmation: Details screen, in the tab Area Selection, get an
overview of the possible entries in the Header area field and in the Area fields of the Detail
areas.
Also, get an overview of the entries in the Default tab.
Choose the Preview button to preview the layout for the corresponding time ticket
confirmation.
Finally, Exit the single screen entry.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 248

 Unit 5
Exercise 25
Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Business Scenario
Confirmations are the premise for progress control and the basis for entering internal
activities performed for the order. For this reason, confirmations should be carried out as
promptly and efficiently as possible.
You can confirm individual operations or entire orders.
Due to the different requirements that arise in practice, SAP provides several confirmation
apps and transactions.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Perform Time Ticket Confirmations

You perform time ticket confirmations for an operation and check the result.

1. First, you must be sure that all production orders have been released for production
supervisor P##.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Schedule Order Release Runs tile to schedule an
order release run.
In the Application Jobs screen, choose New.

Hint:
You could also copy the job that you executed in a previous exercise.

In the New Job screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Job Template Release Order at Scheduled Release Date

Job Name P## Order Release

Start Immediately X

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

for all Dates Delete all conditions

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 249

Unit 5: Order Execution

Choose Schedule to start the release run.

In the Application Jobs screen, choose Go to refresh the screen. Wait until your job has
been finished.
Finally, choose Home to close the app.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to check
the current situation for your product T-FSP1##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue or Enter and check the current situation. Several production orders are
displayed for material T-FSP1##.

3. Note the number of the first production order in the list:

>

Display the production order.

Double-click the order number. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, choose
the Display Element icon.
Choose Operations to navigate to the operation overview.
Select all operations and double-click the first operation to display the operation details.
For each operation, note the confirmation number. Use the buttons Next Operation and
Previous Operation to navigate from operation to operation.

Operation Confirmation

0010

0020

0030

Choose the input help (F4) for the control key YBP1 of an operation and note the setting
for an operation confirmation:

>

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 250

 Exercise 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Confirm Production Order Operation tile to
perform a time ticket confirmation for the first operation 0010 of your production order.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the confirmation number of the first operation and choose
Enter.
The data to be confirmed will be proposed.
Change the yield to be confirmed from 20 PC to 11 PC and choose Enter.
The following information will be displayed: Activities are recalculated due to quantity
change.
Choose Continue to close the message and Save the confirmation.
Don’t close Time Ticket tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Time Ticket tab.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the first production order again.

In the order header, check the confirmed start date and note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status of the first operation:

Status Text

>

Display the details of the first operation. Navigate to the Qties/Activities tab and note the
following data:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield

Operation Qty

Activity Confirmed To Be Conf.

Setup

Machine

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 251

Unit 5: Order Execution

Activity Confirmed To Be Conf.

Labor

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the following information:

Transaction Origin Origin (Text) Total Actual Total Actual

Costs Qty

Confirmations 10101301/1 Machine

10101301/3 Setup

10101301/11 Personnel

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

6. In the Time Ticket tab perform another time ticket confirmation for the first operation
0010 of your production order.
Enter the confirmation number of the first operation and choose Enter.
The data still to be confirmed will be proposed.
Accept the proposed data and Save the confirmation.
Finally, close Time Ticket tab.

7. In the stock/requirements list, display the first production order again.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status of the first operation:

Status Text

>

Display the details of the first operation. Navigate to the Qties/Activities tab and note the
following data:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 252

 Exercise 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Field Value

Operation Qty

Activity Confirmed To Be Conf.

Setup

Machine

Labor

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the following information:

Transaction Origin Origin (Text) Total Actual Total Actual

Costs Qty

Confirmations 10101301/1 Machine

10101301/3 Setup

10101301/11 Personnel

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Task 2: Perform Time Event Confirmations

You perform time event confirmations for an operation and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Time Event tile to perform time event
confirmations for the second operation 0020 of your production order.
A new tab will be opened. In the Create Time Event tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Start of Setup x

Confirmation Confirmation number of second operation

Choose Continue.
In the Confirmation of Time Event Enter: Actual Data screen, enter the following data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 253

Unit 5: Order Execution

Field Value for Date Value for Time

Start of Setup Yesterday [Link]

Save the confirmation.

Don’t close the Time Event tab.

2. Perform another time event confirmation for the second operation 0020 of your
production order.
In the Create Time Event tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Finish of Setup x

Confirmation Confirmation number of second operation

Choose Continue.
In the Confirmation of Time Event Enter: Actual Data screen, enter the following data:

Field Value for Date Value for Time

Finish Setup Yesterday [Link]

Save the confirmation.

Don’t close the Time Event tab.

3. Perform another time event confirmation for the second operation 0020 of your
production order.
In the Create Time Event tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Start Processing x

Confirmation Confirmation number of second operation

Choose Continue.
In the Confirmation of Time Event Enter: Actual Data screen, enter the following data:

Field Value for Date Value for Time

Start of Proc. Yesterday [Link]

Save the confirmation.

Don’t close the Time Event tab.

4. Perform another time event confirmation for the second operation 0020 of your
production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 254

 Exercise 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

In the Create Time Event tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Finish Processing x

Confirmation Confirmation number of second operation

Choose Continue.
In the Confirmation of Time Event Enter: Actual Data screen, enter the following data:

Field Value for Date Value for Time

Fin. Processing Today [Link]

Save the confirmation.

Finally, close the Time Event tab.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the first production order again.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status of the second
operation:

Status Text

>

Display the details of the second operation. Navigate to the Confirmed Dates tab and
check the confirmed dates and times.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Task 3: Perform a Confirmation via Collective Entry

You use the collective entry to perform a time ticket confirmation and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Collective Entry of Confirmations tile to perform a
time ticket confirmation for the third operation 0030 of your production order in the
collective entry environment.
A new tab will be opened. In the Collect Entry: Time Ticket tab, enter the following data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 255

Unit 5: Order Execution

Confirmations
Confirm. F

Confirmation number of third operation X

Choose Enter and Save the confirmation.

Finally, close the Collective Entry tab.

2. In the stock/requirements list, display the first production order again.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status of the third
operation:

Status Text

>

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Task 4: Perform Milestone Confirmations

You set up and perform milestone confirmations and check the result.

1. In the stock/requirements list, note the number of the second production order in the list:
>

Change the production order.

Double-click the order number. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, choose
the Change Element icon.
Choose Operations to navigate to the operation overview.
Change the control keys of the operations as follows:

Operation Control Key

0010 PT01

0020 PT01

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 256

 Exercise 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Operation Control Key

0030 PT05

Choose the input help (F4) for the control keys and note the settings for an operation
confirmation:

Control Key Confirmation setting

PT01

PT05

Save the order and navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Confirm Production Order Operation tile to
perform a time ticket confirmation for your second production order.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the order number and choose Enter.
The confirmation data for operation 0030 will be proposed.
Change the yield to be confirmed from 20 PC to 11 PC and choose Enter.
The following information will be displayed: Activities are recalculated due to quantity
change.
Choose Continue to close the message and Save the confirmation.
Don’t close the Time Ticket tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Time Ticket tab.

3. In the stock/requirements list, display the second production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the both confirmation statuses for each
operation:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 257

Unit 5: Order Execution

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 >
>

0020 >
>

0030 >
>

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

4. In the Time Ticket tab, perform another time ticket confirmation for your second
production order.
Enter the order number and choose Enter.
The data still to be confirmed for operation 0030 will be proposed.
Accept the proposed data and Save the confirmation.
Finally, close the Time Ticket tab.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the second production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the two confirmation statuses for each
operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 >
>

0020 >
>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 258

 Exercise 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0030 >
>

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Task 5: Perform Progress Confirmations

You perform progress confirmations and check the result.

1. In the stock/requirements list, note the number of the third production order in the list:
>

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create confirmation of prod. order tile to perform
progress confirmations for your third production order.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter the following data to confirm operation
0030:

Field Value

Order Number of your third production order

Activity 0030

Choose Enter.
The confirmation data for operation 0030 will be proposed.
Change the yield to be confirmed from 20 PC to 11 PC and choose Enter.
The following information will be displayed: Activities are recalculated due to quantity
change.
Choose Continue to close the message and Save the confirmation.
Don’t close the Progress Confirmation tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 259

Unit 5: Order Execution

Note:
Don’t close the Progress Confirmation tab.

3. In the stock/requirements list, display the third production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the two confirmation statuses for each
operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 >
>

0020 >
>

0030 >
>

Note:
A progress confirmation automatically sets a milestone.

Also, display and analyze the data in theQties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

4. In the Progress Confirmation tab, perform another progress confirmation for your third
production order.
In the initial screen, enter the following data to confirm operation 0030 again:

Field Value

Order Number of your third production order

Activity 0030

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 260

 Exercise 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Choose Enter.
The data still to be confirmed for operation 0030 will be proposed.

Note:
In contrast to all other kinds of confirmations, the current total quantity has
always to be entered. The difference between the already confirmed quantity
and the entered total quantity will be calculated automatically.

Accept the proposed data and Save the confirmation.

Finally, close the Progress Confirmation tab.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the third production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the two confirmation statuses for each
operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 >
>

0020 >
>

0030 >
>

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Task 6: Confirm a Production Order

You confirm a production order and check the result.

1. In the stock/requirements list, note the number of the fourth production order in the list:
>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 261

Unit 5: Order Execution

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Enter Production order Confirmation tile to
confirm your fourth production order.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter number of your fourth production
order.
Choose Continue.
The yield quantity to be confirmed will be proposed.
Change the yield quantity from 20 PC to 11 PC and choose Enter.
Save the confirmation.
Don’t close the Production Order Confirmation tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Production Order Confirmation tab.

3. In the stock/requirements list, display the fourth production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status for each operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010

0020

0030

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

4. In the Production Order Confirmation tab, perform another confirmation for your fourth
production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 262

 Exercise 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

In the initial screen, enter number of your fourth production order.

Choose Continue.
The yield quantity still to be confirmed will be proposed.
Accept the proposed yield quantity and Save the confirmation.
Finally, close the Production Order Confirmation tab.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the fourth production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status for each operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010

0020

0030

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Task 7: Perform Confirmations via Mass Processing

You confirm production order via mass processing and check the result.

1. Confirm all production orders for your product T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000003 Standard Layout of Confirmation

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 263

Unit 5: Order Execution

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Syst. Status CNF

Excl. x

and TECO

Excl. x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Confirmation

Display applicat. toolbar x

Button Confirmation selected

Confirmation Type Enter order confirmation

Insert in Error Table Insert of all non-processed confirmations in er-

ror table

Switch Confirmation Fields to Changea- x

ble

Default Values Suggest Plan Data

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Order Headers list, select all production orders and choose
Confirmation.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The production orders have disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.

2. In the stock/requirements list, display any production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Finally, close the stock/requirements list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 264

 Unit 5
Solution 25
Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Business Scenario
Confirmations are the premise for progress control and the basis for entering internal
activities performed for the order. For this reason, confirmations should be carried out as
promptly and efficiently as possible.
You can confirm individual operations or entire orders.
Due to the different requirements that arise in practice, SAP provides several confirmation
apps and transactions.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Perform Time Ticket Confirmations

You perform time ticket confirmations for an operation and check the result.

1. First, you must be sure that all production orders have been released for production
supervisor P##.
In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Schedule Order Release Runs tile to schedule an
order release run.
In the Application Jobs screen, choose New.

Hint:
You could also copy the job that you executed in a previous exercise.

In the New Job screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Job Template Release Order at Scheduled Release Date

Job Name P## Order Release

Start Immediately X

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

for all Dates Delete all conditions

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 265

Unit 5: Order Execution

Choose Schedule to start the release run.

In the Application Jobs screen, choose Go to refresh the screen. Wait until your job has
been finished.
Finally, choose Home to close the app.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to check
the current situation for your product T-FSP1##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue or Enter and check the current situation. Several production orders are
displayed for material T-FSP1##.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. Note the number of the first production order in the list:

>

Display the production order.

Double-click the order number. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, choose
the Display Element icon.
Choose Operations to navigate to the operation overview.
Select all operations and double-click the first operation to display the operation details.
For each operation, note the confirmation number. Use the buttons Next Operation and
Previous Operation to navigate from operation to operation.

Operation Confirmation

0010

0020

0030

Choose the input help (F4) for the control key YBP1 of an operation and note the setting
for an operation confirmation:

>

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 266

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) For the control key YBP1, you should find the following setting for an operation
confirmation:
Confirmation required

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Confirm Production Order Operation tile to
perform a time ticket confirmation for the first operation 0010 of your production order.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the confirmation number of the first operation and choose
Enter.
The data to be confirmed will be proposed.
Change the yield to be confirmed from 20 PC to 11 PC and choose Enter.
The following information will be displayed: Activities are recalculated due to quantity
change.
Choose Continue to close the message and Save the confirmation.
Don’t close Time Ticket tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Time Ticket tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the first production order again.

In the order header, check the confirmed start date and note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status of the first operation:

Status Text

>

Display the details of the first operation. Navigate to the Qties/Activities tab and note the
following data:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield

Operation Qty

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 267

Unit 5: Order Execution

Activity Confirmed To Be Conf.

Setup

Machine

Labor

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the following information:

Transaction Origin Origin (Text) Total Actual Total Actual

Costs Qty

Confirmations 10101301/1 Machine

10101301/3 Setup

10101301/11 Personnel

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following status and data:

Status Text

PCNF Partially confirmed

Field Value

Confirmed Yield 11 PC

Operation Qty 20 PC

Activity Confirmed To Be Conf.

Setup 30 MIN 30 MIN

Machine 165 MIN 300 MIN

Labor 165 MIN 300 MIN

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 268

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Transaction Origin Origin (Text) Total Actual Total Actual

Costs Qty

Confirmations 10101301/1 Machine 82,50 2,750

10101301/3 Setup 15,00 0,5

10101301/11 Personnel 96,25 2,75

Depending on the current prices in the training system, the costs could be different.

6. In the Time Ticket tab perform another time ticket confirmation for the first operation
0010 of your production order.
Enter the confirmation number of the first operation and choose Enter.
The data still to be confirmed will be proposed.
Accept the proposed data and Save the confirmation.
Finally, close Time Ticket tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

7. In the stock/requirements list, display the first production order again.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status of the first operation:

Status Text

>

Display the details of the first operation. Navigate to the Qties/Activities tab and note the
following data:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield

Operation Qty

Activity Confirmed To Be Conf.

Setup

Machine

Labor

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 269

Unit 5: Order Execution

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the following information:

Transaction Origin Origin (Text) Total Actual Total Actual

Costs Qty

Confirmations 10101301/1 Machine

10101301/3 Setup

10101301/11 Personnel

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following statuses and data:

Status Header Text

PCNF Partially confirmed

Status Operation Text

CNF Confirmed

Field Value

Confirmed Yield 20 PC

Operation Qty 20 PC

Activity Confirmed To Be Conf.

Setup 30 MIN 30 MIN

Machine 300 MIN 300 MIN

Labor 300 MIN 300 MIN

Transaction Origin Origin (Text) Total Actual Total Actual

Costs Qty

Confirmations 10101301/1 Machine 150 5

10101301/3 Setup 15,00 0,5

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 270

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Transaction Origin Origin (Text) Total Actual Total Actual

Costs Qty

10101301/11 Personnel 175 5

Depending on the current prices in the training system, the costs could be different.

Task 2: Perform Time Event Confirmations

You perform time event confirmations for an operation and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Time Event tile to perform time event
confirmations for the second operation 0020 of your production order.
A new tab will be opened. In the Create Time Event tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Start of Setup x

Confirmation Confirmation number of second operation

Choose Continue.
In the Confirmation of Time Event Enter: Actual Data screen, enter the following data:

Field Value for Date Value for Time

Start of Setup Yesterday [Link]

Save the confirmation.

Don’t close the Time Event tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Perform another time event confirmation for the second operation 0020 of your
production order.
In the Create Time Event tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Finish of Setup x

Confirmation Confirmation number of second operation

Choose Continue.
In the Confirmation of Time Event Enter: Actual Data screen, enter the following data:

Field Value for Date Value for Time

Finish Setup Yesterday [Link]

Save the confirmation.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 271

Unit 5: Order Execution

Don’t close the Time Event tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. Perform another time event confirmation for the second operation 0020 of your
production order.
In the Create Time Event tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Start Processing x

Confirmation Confirmation number of second operation

Choose Continue.
In the Confirmation of Time Event Enter: Actual Data screen, enter the following data:

Field Value for Date Value for Time

Start of Proc. Yesterday [Link]

Save the confirmation.

Don’t close the Time Event tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. Perform another time event confirmation for the second operation 0020 of your
production order.
In the Create Time Event tab, enter the following data:

Field Value

Finish Processing x

Confirmation Confirmation number of second operation

Choose Continue.
In the Confirmation of Time Event Enter: Actual Data screen, enter the following data:

Field Value for Date Value for Time

Fin. Processing Today [Link]

Save the confirmation.

Finally, close the Time Event tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the first production order again.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 272

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status of the second
operation:

Status Text

>

Display the details of the second operation. Navigate to the Confirmed Dates tab and
check the confirmed dates and times.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following statuses:

Status Header Text

PCNF Partially confirmed

Status Operation Text

CNF Confirmed

Task 3: Perform a Confirmation via Collective Entry

You use the collective entry to perform a time ticket confirmation and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Collective Entry of Confirmations tile to perform a
time ticket confirmation for the third operation 0030 of your production order in the
collective entry environment.
A new tab will be opened. In the Collect Entry: Time Ticket tab, enter the following data:

Confirmations
Confirm. F

Confirmation number of third operation X

Choose Enter and Save the confirmation.

Finally, close the Collective Entry tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the stock/requirements list, display the first production order again.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 273

Unit 5: Order Execution

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status of the third
operation:

Status Text

>

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following statuses:

Status Header Text

CNF Confirmed

Status Operation Text

CNF Confirmed

Task 4: Perform Milestone Confirmations

You set up and perform milestone confirmations and check the result.

1. In the stock/requirements list, note the number of the second production order in the list:
>

Change the production order.

Double-click the order number. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, choose
the Change Element icon.
Choose Operations to navigate to the operation overview.
Change the control keys of the operations as follows:

Operation Control Key

0010 PT01

0020 PT01

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 274

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Operation Control Key

0030 PT05

Choose the input help (F4) for the control keys and note the settings for an operation
confirmation:

Control Key Confirmation setting

PT01

PT05

Save the order and navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following confirmation settings:

Control Key Confirmation setting

PT01 Confirmation possible but not necessary

PT05 Milestone confirmation

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Confirm Production Order Operation tile to
perform a time ticket confirmation for your second production order.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the order number and choose Enter.
The confirmation data for operation 0030 will be proposed.
Change the yield to be confirmed from 20 PC to 11 PC and choose Enter.
The following information will be displayed: Activities are recalculated due to quantity
change.
Choose Continue to close the message and Save the confirmation.
Don’t close the Time Ticket tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Time Ticket tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the stock/requirements list, display the second production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 275

Unit 5: Order Execution

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the both confirmation statuses for each
operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 >
>

0020 >
>

0030 >
>

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following statuses:

Status Header Text

PCNF Partially confirmed

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 PCNF Partially confirmed

MILE Milestone confirmation

0020 PCNF Partially confirmed

MILE Milestone confirmation

0030 PCNF Partially confirmed

MILE Milestone confirmation

4. In the Time Ticket tab, perform another time ticket confirmation for your second
production order.
Enter the order number and choose Enter.
The data still to be confirmed for operation 0030 will be proposed.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 276

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Accept the proposed data and Save the confirmation.

Finally, close the Time Ticket tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the second production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the two confirmation statuses for each
operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 >
>

0020 >
>

0030 >
>

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following statuses:

Status Header Text

CNF Confirmed

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 CNF Confirmed

MILE Milestone confirmation

0020 CNF Confirmed

MILE Milestone confirmation

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 277

Unit 5: Order Execution

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0030 CNF Confirmed

MILE Milestone confirmation

Task 5: Perform Progress Confirmations

You perform progress confirmations and check the result.

1. In the stock/requirements list, note the number of the third production order in the list:
>

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create confirmation of prod. order tile to perform
progress confirmations for your third production order.
A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter the following data to confirm operation
0030:

Field Value

Order Number of your third production order

Activity 0030

Choose Enter.
The confirmation data for operation 0030 will be proposed.
Change the yield to be confirmed from 20 PC to 11 PC and choose Enter.
The following information will be displayed: Activities are recalculated due to quantity
change.
Choose Continue to close the message and Save the confirmation.
Don’t close the Progress Confirmation tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Progress Confirmation tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the stock/requirements list, display the third production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 278

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the two confirmation statuses for each
operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 >
>

0020 >
>

0030 >
>

Note:
A progress confirmation automatically sets a milestone.

Also, display and analyze the data in theQties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following statuses:

Status Header Text

PCNF Partially confirmed

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 PCNF Partially confirmed

PROG Progress confirmation (MST)

0020 PCNF Partially confirmed

PROG Progress confirmation (MST)

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 279

Unit 5: Order Execution

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0030 PCNF Partially confirmed

PROG Progress confirmation (MST)

4. In the Progress Confirmation tab, perform another progress confirmation for your third
production order.
In the initial screen, enter the following data to confirm operation 0030 again:

Field Value

Order Number of your third production order

Activity 0030

Choose Enter.
The data still to be confirmed for operation 0030 will be proposed.

Note:
In contrast to all other kinds of confirmations, the current total quantity has
always to be entered. The difference between the already confirmed quantity
and the entered total quantity will be calculated automatically.

Accept the proposed data and Save the confirmation.

Finally, close the Progress Confirmation tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the third production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the two confirmation statuses for each
operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 >
>

0020 >
>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 280

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0030 >
>

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following statuses:

Status Header Text

CNF Confirmed

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 CNF Confirmed

PROG Progress confirmation

0020 CNF Confirmed

PROG Progress confirmation

0030 CNF Confirmed

PROG Progress confirmation

Task 6: Confirm a Production Order

You confirm a production order and check the result.

1. In the stock/requirements list, note the number of the fourth production order in the list:
>

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Enter Production order Confirmation tile to
confirm your fourth production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 281

Unit 5: Order Execution

A new tab will be opened. In the initial screen, enter number of your fourth production
order.
Choose Continue.
The yield quantity to be confirmed will be proposed.
Change the yield quantity from 20 PC to 11 PC and choose Enter.
Save the confirmation.
Don’t close the Production Order Confirmation tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Production Order Confirmation tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the stock/requirements list, display the fourth production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status for each operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010

0020

0030

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following statuses:

Status Header Text

PCNF Partially confirmed

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 PCNF Partially confirmed

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 282

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0020 PCNF Partially confirmed

0030 PCNF Partially confirmed

4. In the Production Order Confirmation tab, perform another confirmation for your fourth
production order.
In the initial screen, enter number of your fourth production order.
Choose Continue.
The yield quantity still to be confirmed will be proposed.
Accept the proposed yield quantity and Save the confirmation.
Finally, close the Production Order Confirmation tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. In the stock/requirements list, display the fourth production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Navigate to the operation overview and note the confirmation status for each operation:

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010

0020

0030

Also, display and analyze the data in the Qties/Activities tab for each operation.
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following statuses:

Status Header Text

CNF Confirmed

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 283

Unit 5: Order Execution

Operation Confirmation Statuses Text

0010 CNF Confirmed

0020 CNF Confirmed

0030 CNF Confirmed

Task 7: Perform Confirmations via Mass Processing

You confirm production order via mass processing and check the result.

1. Confirm all production orders for your product T-FSP1##.

In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the header of the initial screen:

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000003 Standard Layout of Confirmation

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Syst. Status CNF

Excl. x

and TECO

Excl. x

Enter the following data in the mass processing area of the initial screen:

Field Value

Function Confirmation

Display applicat. toolbar x

Button Confirmation selected

Confirmation Type Enter order confirmation

Insert in Error Table Insert of all non-processed confirmations in er-

ror table

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 284

 Solution 25: Confirm Operations and Production Orders

Field Value

Switch Confirmation Fields to Changea- x

ble

Default Values Suggest Plan Data

Choose Execute.
In the Mass Processing – Order Headers list, select all production orders and choose
Confirmation.
Choose More → List → Refresh. The production orders have disappeared.
Finally, Close the mass processing tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the stock/requirements list, display any production order.

In the order header, note the confirmation status:

Status Text

>

Finally, close the stock/requirements list.

a) You should find the following status for all production orders:
Status Header Text

CNF Confirmed

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 285

 Unit 5
Exercise 26
Post Goods Receipts

Business Scenario
Goods receipts for production orders can be posted manually using the goods movement app
or automatically triggered by confirmations.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Post Goods Receipts with the Goods Movement App

You post goods receipts with the goods movement app and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to check
the current situation for your product T-FSP1##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue or Enter and check the current situation. Several production orders are
displayed for material T-FSP1##.

2. Note the number of the first production order in the list:

>

Note the current stock and the receipt quantity of the first production order:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock

PrdOrd

Display the first production order.

Double-click the order number. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, choose
the Display Element icon.
In the General tab of the order header, note the following information:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 286

 Exercise 26: Post Goods Receipts

Field Value

Total Qty

Delivered

In the Goods Receipt tab of the order header, note the following settings:
Field Value

Stock Type

GR Proc. Durn

Goods Receipt

Delivery Completed

Underdelivery

Overdelivery

Unlimited Overdelivery

Stor. location

Note:
The default values for the stock type Quality inspection, for the goods receipt
processing duration, for the delivery tolerances, and for the goods receipt
storage location are maintained in the material master of your product T-
FSP1##.

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Post Goods Movements tile to post the goods
receipt for your first production order.
A new tab will be opened. Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your
production order.
Change the proposed goods receipt quantity from 20 PC to 11 PC.
Set the OK flag and choose Check.
The following message will be displayed: Deficit of OR Order quantity 9 PC.
Choose Enter to confirm the message and Post the goods receipt.
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 287

Unit 5: Order Execution

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

4. Refresh the stock/requirements list and note the current stock and the receipt quantity of
the first production order again:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock

PrdOrd

Interpret the result.

Display the first production order.
In the General tab of the order header, note the following information:
Field Value

Total Qty

Delivered

In the Goods Receipt tab of the order header, note the following setting:
Field Value

Delivery Completed

Note the delivery status of the order:

Status Text

>

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Receipt T-FSP1##

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and analyze the current
information.
Is the goods receipt documented?
What is the corresponding goods movement indicator?
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 288

 Exercise 26: Post Goods Receipts

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

5. In the Goods Receipt tab, post another goods receipt for your first production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your production order.
Accept the proposed goods receipt quantity of 9 PC.
Set the OK flag, choose Check and Post the goods receipt.
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

6. Refresh the stock/requirements list and interpret the result.

Finally, close the stock/requirements list.

7. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Production Order tile to display your first
production order.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the number of your first production order in the initial
screen and choose Continue.
In the General tab of the order header, note the following information:
Field Value

Total Qty

Delivered

In the Goods Receipt tab of the order header, note the following information:
Field Value

Delivery Completed

Note the delivery status of the order:

Status Text

>

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Receipt T-FSP1##

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and analyze the current
information.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 289

Unit 5: Order Execution

Finally, navigate back to the initial screen.

Don’t close the Production Order Change: Initial Screen.

Note:
Don’t close the Production Order Change: Initial Screen.

8. In the Goods Receipt tab, try to post another goods receipt for your first production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your production order.
Enter a goods receipt quantity of 1 PC.
Set the OK flag, and choose Check.
The following error message will be displayed: OR Order quantity exceeded by 1
PC.
Choose Enter to confirm the message.
Delete the OK flag, then Delete the goods receipt line.
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

9. In the Production Order Change: Initial Screen, enter the number of your first production
and choose Continue.
In the Goods Receipt tab of the order header, define the following setting:
Field Value

Unlimited Overdelivery x

Save the production order.

Don’t close the Production Order Change: Initial Screen screen.

Note:
Don’t close the Production Order Change: Initial Screen screen.

10. In the Goods Receipt tab, try to post another goods receipt for your first production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your production order.
Enter a goods receipt quantity of 1 PC.
Set the OK flag, and choose Check.
Finally, Post the goods receipt and close the tab.

11. In the Production Order Change: Initial Screen, enter the number of your first production
and choose Continue.
In the General tab of the order header, note the following information:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 290

 Exercise 26: Post Goods Receipts

Field Value

Total Qty

Delivered

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Receipt T-FSP1##

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and analyze the updated
information.
Finally, close the tab.

Task 2: Post an Automatic Goods Receipt

Post a goods receipt automatically triggered by a confirmation.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for your semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
Click on the Select Variant icon in the left upper corner and choose your Variant for T-
SSP1##.
Only the production order for material T-SSP1## will be displayed.
Note the status of the order:
Status

>

2. Select the order and choose Edit.

The order will be opened in a new tab.
Navigate to the operations overview.
Choose the input help (F4) for the control key YBP3 of the last operation 0020 and note
the setting of the following indicator:
Indicator Setting

Automatic Goods Receipt

Finally, close the tab.

3. Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.
In the detail screen, choose Order Information and note the following information:
Field Value

Confirmed Yield

GR Quantity

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 291

Unit 5: Order Execution

Choose Order Schedule to display the operations.

Note the status of each operation:
Operation Status

0010

0020

4. Click in the line of the last operation 0020 to navigate to the Manage Production
Operations view.
Choose Confirm Operation.
A new tab will be opened. In the Enter Time Ticket for Production Order tab, change the
proposed yield to be confirmed from 10 PC to 6 PC.
Choose Goods Movements and note the information in the goods movement overview:
Material Quantity Movement Type

>

Interpret the information.

Finally, Post the conformation and close the tab.

5. Refresh (F5) the Manage Production Operations view.

Choose Order Schedule to display the operations.
Note the status of each operation:

Operation Status

0010

0020

6. Navigate back to the Manage Production Orders view.

Note the current status of the order:
Status

>

Choose Order Information and note the following information:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield

GR Quantity

7. Choose Order Schedule and click in the line of the last operation 0020 to navigate to the
Manage Production Operations view again.
Choose Confirm Operation.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 292

 Exercise 26: Post Goods Receipts

A new tab will be opened. In the Enter Time Ticket for Production Order tab, accept the
open yield to be confirmed of 4 PC.
Choose Goods Movements and note the information in the goods movement overview:
Material Quantity Movement Type

>

Interpret the information.

Finally, Post the conformation and close the tab.

8. Refresh (F5) the Manage Production Operations view.

Choose Order Schedule to display the operations.
Note the status of each operation:
Operation Status

0010

0020

9. Navigate back to the Manage Production Orders view.

Note the current status of the order:

Status

>

Choose Order Information and note the following information:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield

GR Quantity

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 293

 Unit 5
Solution 26
Post Goods Receipts

Business Scenario
Goods receipts for production orders can be posted manually using the goods movement app
or automatically triggered by confirmations.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Post Goods Receipts with the Goods Movement App

You post goods receipts with the goods movement app and check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Stock / Requirements List tile to check
the current situation for your product T-FSP1##.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

Choose Continue or Enter and check the current situation. Several production orders are
displayed for material T-FSP1##.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. Note the number of the first production order in the list:

>

Note the current stock and the receipt quantity of the first production order:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock

PrdOrd

Display the first production order.

Double-click the order number. In the Additional Data for MRP Element window, choose
the Display Element icon.
In the General tab of the order header, note the following information:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 294

 Solution 26: Post Goods Receipts

Field Value

Total Qty

Delivered

In the Goods Receipt tab of the order header, note the following settings:
Field Value

Stock Type

GR Proc. Durn

Goods Receipt

Delivery Completed

Underdelivery

Overdelivery

Unlimited Overdelivery

Stor. location

Note:
The default values for the stock type Quality inspection, for the goods receipt
processing duration, for the delivery tolerances, and for the goods receipt
storage location are maintained in the material master of your product T-
FSP1##.

Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.

Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You will find the following current situation in the stock/requirements list:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock Current stock

PrdOrd 20 Current stock + 20

You will find the following information in the General tab of the order header.
Field Value

Total Qty 20

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 295

Unit 5: Order Execution

Field Value

Delivered 0

You will find the following settings in the Goods Receipt tab of the order header.
Field Value

Stock Type Unrestricted use

GR Proc. Durn 0

Goods Receipt x

Delivery Completed

Underdelivery 0

Overdelivery 0

Unlimited Overdelivery

Stor. location 101A

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Post Goods Movements tile to post the goods
receipt for your first production order.
A new tab will be opened. Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your
production order.
Change the proposed goods receipt quantity from 20 PC to 11 PC.
Set the OK flag and choose Check.
The following message will be displayed: Deficit of OR Order quantity 9 PC.
Choose Enter to confirm the message and Post the goods receipt.
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. Refresh the stock/requirements list and note the current stock and the receipt quantity of
the first production order again:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock

PrdOrd

Interpret the result.

Display the first production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 296

 Solution 26: Post Goods Receipts

In the General tab of the order header, note the following information:
Field Value

Total Qty

Delivered

In the Goods Receipt tab of the order header, note the following setting:
Field Value

Delivery Completed

Note the delivery status of the order:

Status Text

>

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Receipt T-FSP1##

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and analyze the current
information.
Is the goods receipt documented?
What is the corresponding goods movement indicator?
Finally, navigate back to the stock/requirements list.
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

Note:
Don’t close the stock/requirements list.

a) You will find the following current situation in the stock/requirements list:
MRP element Receipt/Reqmt Available Qty

Stock Current stock =

Previous stock + 11

PrdOrd 9 Current stock + 9

The stock has been increased and the receipt quantity has been reduced accordingly
by the goods receipt posting.
You will find the following information in the General tab of the order header.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 297

Unit 5: Order Execution

Field Value

Total Qty 20

Delivered 11

You will find the following setting in the Goods Receipt tab of the order header.
Field Value

Delivery Completed

You will find the following delivery status:

Status Text

PDLV Partially delivered

You will find the following situation in the costs analysis:

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Receipt T-FSP1## 582,01– 11–

Depending on the current price in the training system, the actual costs could be
different.
In the Documented Goods Movements, the goods receipt is documented with goods
movement indicator 4 Goods receipt for production order.

5. In the Goods Receipt tab, post another goods receipt for your first production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your production order.
Accept the proposed goods receipt quantity of 9 PC.
Set the OK flag, choose Check and Post the goods receipt.
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

6. Refresh the stock/requirements list and interpret the result.

Finally, close the stock/requirements list.
a) The stock has been increased accordingly by the goods receipt posting. The
production order has been disappeared.

7. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Production Order tile to display your first
production order.
A new tab will be opened. Enter the number of your first production order in the initial
screen and choose Continue.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 298

 Solution 26: Post Goods Receipts

In the General tab of the order header, note the following information:
Field Value

Total Qty

Delivered

In the Goods Receipt tab of the order header, note the following information:
Field Value

Delivery Completed

Note the delivery status of the order:

Status Text

>

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Receipt T-FSP1##

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and analyze the current
information.
Finally, navigate back to the initial screen.
Don’t close the Production Order Change: Initial Screen.

Note:
Don’t close the Production Order Change: Initial Screen.

a) You will find the following information in the General tab of the order header.
Field Value

Total Qty 20

Delivered 20

You will find the following setting in the Goods Receipt tab of the order header.
Field Value

Delivery Completed X

You will find the following delivery status:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 299

Unit 5: Order Execution

Status Text

DLV Delivered

You will find the following situation in the costs analysis:

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Receipt T-FSP1## 1.058,20– 20–

Depending on the current price in the training system, the actual costs could be
different.

8. In the Goods Receipt tab, try to post another goods receipt for your first production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your production order.
Enter a goods receipt quantity of 1 PC.
Set the OK flag, and choose Check.
The following error message will be displayed: OR Order quantity exceeded by 1
PC.
Choose Enter to confirm the message.
Delete the OK flag, then Delete the goods receipt line.
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

Note:
Don’t close the Goods Receipt tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

9. In the Production Order Change: Initial Screen, enter the number of your first production
and choose Continue.
In the Goods Receipt tab of the order header, define the following setting:
Field Value

Unlimited Overdelivery x

Save the production order.

Don’t close the Production Order Change: Initial Screen screen.

Note:
Don’t close the Production Order Change: Initial Screen screen.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

10. In the Goods Receipt tab, try to post another goods receipt for your first production order.
Choose Goods Receipt for Order, and enter the number of your production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 300

 Solution 26: Post Goods Receipts

Enter a goods receipt quantity of 1 PC.

Set the OK flag, and choose Check.
Finally, Post the goods receipt and close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

11. In the Production Order Change: Initial Screen, enter the number of your first production
and choose Continue.
In the General tab of the order header, note the following information:
Field Value

Total Qty

Delivered

Choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and note the current information:
Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Receipt T-FSP1##

Choose More → Goto → Documented Goods Movements and analyze the updated
information.
Finally, close the tab.
a) You will find the following information in the General tab of the order header.
Field Value

Total Qty 20

Delivered 21

You will find the following situation in the costs analysis:

Transaction Origin Total Actual Costs Total Actual Qty

Goods Receipt T-FSP1## 111,11– 21–

Depending on the current price in the training system, the actual costs could be
different.

Task 2: Post an Automatic Goods Receipt

Post a goods receipt automatically triggered by a confirmation.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Manage Production Orders tile to display the
production order for your semi-finished material T-SSP1##.
Click on the Select Variant icon in the left upper corner and choose your Variant for T-
SSP1##.
Only the production order for material T-SSP1## will be displayed.
Note the status of the order:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 301

Unit 5: Order Execution

Status

>

a) You should find the following status:

Status

Partially Confirmed

2. Select the order and choose Edit.

The order will be opened in a new tab.
Navigate to the operations overview.
Choose the input help (F4) for the control key YBP3 of the last operation 0020 and note
the setting of the following indicator:
Indicator Setting

Automatic Goods Receipt

Finally, close the tab.

a) You will find the following setting:
Indicator Setting

Automatic Goods Receipt X

3. Click in the line of the production order to get more detailed information.
In the detail screen, choose Order Information and note the following information:
Field Value

Confirmed Yield

GR Quantity

Choose Order Schedule to display the operations.

Note the status of each operation:
Operation Status

0010

0020

a) You should find the following information:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield 0 PC

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 302

 Solution 26: Post Goods Receipts

Field Value

GR Quantity 0 PC

b) You should find the following statuses:

Operation Status

0010 Confirmed

0020 Released

4. Click in the line of the last operation 0020 to navigate to the Manage Production
Operations view.
Choose Confirm Operation.
A new tab will be opened. In the Enter Time Ticket for Production Order tab, change the
proposed yield to be confirmed from 10 PC to 6 PC.
Choose Goods Movements and note the information in the goods movement overview:
Material Quantity Movement Type

>

Interpret the information.

Finally, Post the conformation and close the tab.
a) You will find the following information in the goods movement overview:
Material Quantity Movement Type

T-SSP1## 6 PC 101

b) For material T-SSP1##, an automatic goods receipt with a partial quantity of 6 PC will
be posted when the confirmation is saved.

5. Refresh (F5) the Manage Production Operations view.

Choose Order Schedule to display the operations.
Note the status of each operation:

Operation Status

0010

0020

a) You should find the following statuses:

Operation Status

0010 Confirmed

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 303

Unit 5: Order Execution

Operation Status

0020 Partially Confirmed

6. Navigate back to the Manage Production Orders view.

Note the current status of the order:
Status

>

Choose Order Information and note the following information:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield

GR Quantity

a) You should find the following status:

Status

Partially Delivered

b) You should find the following information:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield 6 PC

GR Quantity 6 PC

7. Choose Order Schedule and click in the line of the last operation 0020 to navigate to the
Manage Production Operations view again.
Choose Confirm Operation.
A new tab will be opened. In the Enter Time Ticket for Production Order tab, accept the
open yield to be confirmed of 4 PC.
Choose Goods Movements and note the information in the goods movement overview:
Material Quantity Movement Type

>

Interpret the information.

Finally, Post the conformation and close the tab.

a) You will find the following information in the goods movement overview:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 304

 Solution 26: Post Goods Receipts

Material Quantity Movement Type

T-SSP1## 4 PC 101

b) For material T-SSP1##, an automatic goods receipt with the open quantity of 4 PC will
be posted when the confirmation is saved.

8. Refresh (F5) the Manage Production Operations view.

Choose Order Schedule to display the operations.
Note the status of each operation:
Operation Status

0010

0020

a) You should find the following statuses:

Operation Status

0010 Confirmed

0020 Confirmed

9. Navigate back to the Manage Production Orders view.

Note the current status of the order:

Status

>

Choose Order Information and note the following information:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield

GR Quantity

a) You should find the following status:

Status

Delivered

b) You should find the following information:

Field Value

Confirmed Yield 10 PC

GR Quantity 10 PC

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 305

 Unit 6
Exercise 27
Settle a Production Order

Business Scenario
An order is debited by goods issues and by confirmations and credited by goods receipts.
After a production order has been delivered, the remaining actual costs must be settled. The
order must have a zero balance so that it can be archived and deleted in a subsequent step.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or an object name includes ##, replace ## with the
number that your instructor assigned to you.

Task 1: Find Production Orders with Status DLV Delivered

Use the production order information system to find the production orders with status DLV
for your production supervisor P## in plant 1010.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Production / Planned Orders tile to call
the production order information system.
The production order information system will be opened in a new tab. Enter the data from
the table below in the header of the initial screen.

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:
Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

Syst. Status DLV

Choose Execute.
In the Order Info System – Order Headers list, at least two production orders for material
T-FSP1## and one production order for material T-SSP1## should be listed.
Don’t leave the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 306

 Exercise 27: Settle a Production Order

Note:
Don’t leave the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

Task 2: Settle a Production Order

1. Settle one of your production orders with status DLV.

In the Order Info System – Order Headers list, note the number of the first production
order:

>

Select this order and choose the Display Object icon to display the production order.
In the order, choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and check the information in the
costs analysis.
The order was debited by goods issues and by confirmations and credited by goods
receipts. Are there any remaining actual costs to be settled? Note these costs:

>

In the order, choose More → Goto → Costs → Balance and note the cost balance:

>

2. In the order, choose More → Header → Settlement Rule and note the following
information:
Cat Settlement Receiver % Settlement Type

>

Navigate back to the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

Don’t leave the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

Note:
Don’t leave the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Run Variance Calculation tile to calculate the
variances for your production order.
A new tab will be opened.
Set controlling area A000 and choose Continue.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Order Number of the first production order in the

order information system

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 307

Unit 6: Order Settlement, Archiving, and Deletion

Field Value

Settlement Period Actual period

(January = 001, February = 002, …)

Fiscal year Actual year

All Tgt Cost Vsns x

Select Target Cost Vsns

Test Run

Detail list x

Choose Execute.
Finally, close the tab.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Run Actual Settlement tile to settle your
production order.
A new tab will be opened.
Set controlling area A000 and choose Continue.
In the initial screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Order Number of the first production order in the order in-

formation system

Settlement Period Actual period

(January = 001, February = 002, …)

Fiscal year Actual year

Test Run

Choose Execute.
The settlement result will be displayed in the Actual Settlement: Order Basic list.
Choose Detail lists to get more detailed information.
Finally, close the tab.

5. In the Order Info System – Order Headers list, display the first production order.
In the order, choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and check the information in the
costs analysis.
Are there any remaining actual costs? Has the order been settled?
In the order, choose More → Goto → Costs → Balance and note the cost balance:

>

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 308

 Exercise 27: Settle a Production Order

Finally, close the tab.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 309

 Unit 6
Solution 27
Settle a Production Order

Business Scenario
An order is debited by goods issues and by confirmations and credited by goods receipts.
After a production order has been delivered, the remaining actual costs must be settled. The
order must have a zero balance so that it can be archived and deleted in a subsequent step.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or an object name includes ##, replace ## with the
number that your instructor assigned to you.

Task 1: Find Production Orders with Status DLV Delivered

Use the production order information system to find the production orders with status DLV
for your production supervisor P## in plant 1010.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Monitor Production / Planned Orders tile to call
the production order information system.
The production order information system will be opened in a new tab. Enter the data from
the table below in the header of the initial screen.

Field Value

List Order Headers

Layout 000000000001

Production Orders x

Planned Orders

Enter the following data in the selection area of the initial screen:
Field Value

Production Plant 1010

Production Supervisor P##

Syst. Status DLV

Choose Execute.
In the Order Info System – Order Headers list, at least two production orders for material
T-FSP1## and one production order for material T-SSP1## should be listed.
Don’t leave the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 310

 Solution 27: Settle a Production Order

Note:
Don’t leave the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 2: Settle a Production Order

1. Settle one of your production orders with status DLV.

In the Order Info System – Order Headers list, note the number of the first production
order:

>

Select this order and choose the Display Object icon to display the production order.
In the order, choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and check the information in the
costs analysis.
The order was debited by goods issues and by confirmations and credited by goods
receipts. Are there any remaining actual costs to be settled? Note these costs:

>

In the order, choose More → Goto → Costs → Balance and note the cost balance:

>

a) There are remaining actual costs in the cost analysis. They correspond to the reported
cost balance.

2. In the order, choose More → Header → Settlement Rule and note the following
information:
Cat Settlement Receiver % Settlement Type

>

Navigate back to the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

Don’t leave the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

Note:
Don’t leave the Order Info System – Order Headers list.

a) You find the following settlement rule:

Cat Settlement Receiver % Settlement Type

MAT T-FSP1## 100 FUL

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 311

Unit 6: Order Settlement, Archiving, and Deletion

3. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Run Variance Calculation tile to calculate the
variances for your production order.
A new tab will be opened.
Set controlling area A000 and choose Continue.
In the initial screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Order Number of the first production order in the

order information system

Settlement Period Actual period

(January = 001, February = 002, …)

Fiscal year Actual year

All Tgt Cost Vsns x

Select Target Cost Vsns

Test Run

Detail list x

Choose Execute.
Finally, close the tab.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Run Actual Settlement tile to settle your
production order.
A new tab will be opened.
Set controlling area A000 and choose Continue.
In the initial screen, enter the following data.

Field Value

Order Number of the first production order in the order in-

formation system

Settlement Period Actual period

(January = 001, February = 002, …)

Fiscal year Actual year

Test Run

Choose Execute.
The settlement result will be displayed in the Actual Settlement: Order Basic list.
Choose Detail lists to get more detailed information.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 312

 Solution 27: Settle a Production Order

Finally, close the tab.

a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

5. In the Order Info System – Order Headers list, display the first production order.
In the order, choose More → Goto → Costs → Analysis and check the information in the
costs analysis.
Are there any remaining actual costs? Has the order been settled?
In the order, choose More → Goto → Costs → Balance and note the cost balance:

>

Finally, close the tab.

a) There are no remaining actual costs in the cost analysis. The order has been settled.

b) The cost balance is as follows:

0,00

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 313

 Unit 6
Exercise 28
Archive and Delete a Production Order

Business Scenario
Production orders that have been settled can be archived and deleted to keep the volume of
data contained in the database small. An administrator starts monthly background jobs for
this purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or an object name includes ##, replace ## with the
number that your instructor assigned to you.

Task 1: Set the Deletion Flag and the Deletion Indicator

You want to archive and delete the production order that you settled in the previous exercise.
The archiving and deletion of orders is carried out in stages. First set the deletion flag and the
deletion indicator.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO78 to open the Archiving of Production
Orders environment.
Choose Deletion flag / deletion indictor to open the Archive Administration: Preprocessing
window.
Define the following variant:
Variant

GR##_FLAG_IND

and choose the Edit button.

In the Variants: Change Screen Assignment select For All Selection Screens and choose
Continue.
In the Edit Variants screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Order Number of the production order that you set-

tled in the previous exercise

Delivery Date Overrun

Set Deletion Flag x

Set Deletion Indicator x

Production Mode x

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 314

 Exercise 28: Archive and Delete a Production Order

Choose Back (F3) and confirm the question in the subsequent dialog box with Yes.
In the Variant Attributes screen, enter the following description:
Description

GR## Deletion flag / indicator

Save the variant and navigate back to the Archive Administration: Preprocessing window.
Choose the Start Date button. In the corresponding dialog box, set the start time
Immediate and Save the start time.

Choose the Spool Parameters button. In the corresponding dialog box, assign output
device LP01 and choose Continue to close the dialog box.
Finally, choose the Execute (F8) icon to start the job.

2. In the backend system, choose transaction CO02. and try to change your production
order.
Enter the order number in the initial screen and choose Enter.
The following information will be displayed: Order already deleted. Do you want
to display the order?.
Choose Yes to display the order.
Note the corresponding statuses set by the background job:

Status Text

>
>

Task 2: Archive the Production Order

After the deletion indicator has been set, you can archive the production order.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO78 to open the Archiving of Production
Orders environment.
Choose Archiving to open the Archive Administration: Create Archive Files window.
Define the following variant:
Variant

GR##_ARCH

and choose the Edit button.

In the Variants: Change Screen Assignment select For All Selection Screens and choose
Continue.
In the Edit Variants screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Order Number of the production order that you settled in

the previous exercise

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 315

Unit 6: Order Settlement, Archiving, and Deletion

Field Value

Production Mode x

Choose Back (F3) and confirm the question in the subsequent dialog box with Yes.
In the Variant Attributes screen, enter the following Description:
Description

GR## Archiving

Save the variant and navigate back to the Archive Administration: Create Archive Files
window.
Choose the Start Date button. In the corresponding dialog box, set the start time
Immediate and Save the start time.

Choose the Spool Parameters button. In the corresponding dialog box, assign output
device LP01 and choose Continue to close the dialog box.
Finally, choose the Execute (F8) icon to start the job.

Task 3: Delete the Production Order

After the production order has been archived, you can delete it in the S/4 HANA database.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO78 to open the Archiving of Production
Orders environment.
Choose Delete to open the Archive Administration: Execute Delete Program window.
Choose the Archive Selection button.
In the Archive Administration dialog box, choose Change layout and add Started by to the
displayed columns.
Now select the archiving object for your user and choose Continue.

2. In the Archive Administration: Execute Delete Program window, choose the Start Date
button. In the corresponding dialog box, set the start time Immediate and Save the start
time.
Choose the Spool Parameters button. In the corresponding dialog box, assign output
device LP01 and choose Continue to close the dialog box.
Finally, choose the Execute (F8) icon to start the job.

3. In the backend system, choose transaction CO02 and try to change your production order.
Enter the order number in the initial screen and choose Enter.
The following error message will be displayed: Order not found .

Task 4: Display the Archived Production Order

After the production order has been deleted, you can use the retrieval function to read the
order data from the archive.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO78 to open the Archiving of Production
Orders environment.
Choose Retrieval to open the Production Order Reorg: Display Archive Data window.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 316

 Exercise 28: Archive and Delete a Production Order

Enter your production supervisor P## as selection criteria and choose Execute (F8).
The data of the archived production order will be displayed in the object overview of the
order information system.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 317

 Unit 6
Solution 28
Archive and Delete a Production Order

Business Scenario
Production orders that have been settled can be archived and deleted to keep the volume of
data contained in the database small. An administrator starts monthly background jobs for
this purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or an object name includes ##, replace ## with the
number that your instructor assigned to you.

Task 1: Set the Deletion Flag and the Deletion Indicator

You want to archive and delete the production order that you settled in the previous exercise.
The archiving and deletion of orders is carried out in stages. First set the deletion flag and the
deletion indicator.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO78 to open the Archiving of Production
Orders environment.
Choose Deletion flag / deletion indictor to open the Archive Administration: Preprocessing
window.
Define the following variant:
Variant

GR##_FLAG_IND

and choose the Edit button.

In the Variants: Change Screen Assignment select For All Selection Screens and choose
Continue.
In the Edit Variants screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Order Number of the production order that you set-

tled in the previous exercise

Delivery Date Overrun

Set Deletion Flag x

Set Deletion Indicator x

Production Mode x

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 318

 Solution 28: Archive and Delete a Production Order

Choose Back (F3) and confirm the question in the subsequent dialog box with Yes.
In the Variant Attributes screen, enter the following description:
Description

GR## Deletion flag / indicator

Save the variant and navigate back to the Archive Administration: Preprocessing window.
Choose the Start Date button. In the corresponding dialog box, set the start time
Immediate and Save the start time.

Choose the Spool Parameters button. In the corresponding dialog box, assign output
device LP01 and choose Continue to close the dialog box.
Finally, choose the Execute (F8) icon to start the job.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the backend system, choose transaction CO02. and try to change your production
order.
Enter the order number in the initial screen and choose Enter.
The following information will be displayed: Order already deleted. Do you want
to display the order?.
Choose Yes to display the order.
Note the corresponding statuses set by the background job:

Status Text

>
>

a) The following status are set:

Status Text

DLT Deletion Indicator

DLFL Deletion Flag

Task 2: Archive the Production Order

After the deletion indicator has been set, you can archive the production order.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO78 to open the Archiving of Production
Orders environment.
Choose Archiving to open the Archive Administration: Create Archive Files window.
Define the following variant:
Variant

GR##_ARCH

and choose the Edit button.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 319

Unit 6: Order Settlement, Archiving, and Deletion

In the Variants: Change Screen Assignment select For All Selection Screens and choose
Continue.
In the Edit Variants screen, enter the following data:

Field Value

Order Number of the production order that you settled in

the previous exercise

Production Mode x

Choose Back (F3) and confirm the question in the subsequent dialog box with Yes.
In the Variant Attributes screen, enter the following Description:
Description

GR## Archiving

Save the variant and navigate back to the Archive Administration: Create Archive Files
window.
Choose the Start Date button. In the corresponding dialog box, set the start time
Immediate and Save the start time.

Choose the Spool Parameters button. In the corresponding dialog box, assign output
device LP01 and choose Continue to close the dialog box.
Finally, choose the Execute (F8) icon to start the job.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 3: Delete the Production Order

After the production order has been archived, you can delete it in the S/4 HANA database.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO78 to open the Archiving of Production
Orders environment.
Choose Delete to open the Archive Administration: Execute Delete Program window.
Choose the Archive Selection button.
In the Archive Administration dialog box, choose Change layout and add Started by to the
displayed columns.
Now select the archiving object for your user and choose Continue.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

2. In the Archive Administration: Execute Delete Program window, choose the Start Date
button. In the corresponding dialog box, set the start time Immediate and Save the start
time.
Choose the Spool Parameters button. In the corresponding dialog box, assign output
device LP01 and choose Continue to close the dialog box.
Finally, choose the Execute (F8) icon to start the job.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

3. In the backend system, choose transaction CO02 and try to change your production order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 320

 Solution 28: Archive and Delete a Production Order

Enter the order number in the initial screen and choose Enter.
The following error message will be displayed: Order not found .
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

Task 4: Display the Archived Production Order

After the production order has been deleted, you can use the retrieval function to read the
order data from the archive.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO78 to open the Archiving of Production
Orders environment.
Choose Retrieval to open the Production Order Reorg: Display Archive Data window.
Enter your production supervisor P## as selection criteria and choose Execute (F8).
The data of the archived production order will be displayed in the object overview of the
order information system.
a) Follow the instructions given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 321

 Unit 7
Exercise 29
Analyze Production Data with the Order
Information System

Business Scenario
As a production supervisor, you constantly require information about the status and progress
of individual or several production orders. For this purpose, you use the order information
system.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task: Use the Order Information System

Use the order information system to analyze various data related to your production orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad , execute the Monitor Production / Planned Order tile to open
the order information system.
First, get an overview of the selectable lists and the various selection options.
Then carry out any evaluations for different lists and with different selection parameters.
For example, evaluate the documented goods movements, the automatic goods
movements, the order headers, the components, the operations, and the confirmations
for your production supervisor P## in plant 1010.
Display the data also in the object overview.

2. Save your selection settings as variants, and change the layout in the list reports.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 322

 Unit 7
Solution 29
Analyze Production Data with the Order
Information System

Business Scenario
As a production supervisor, you constantly require information about the status and progress
of individual or several production orders. For this purpose, you use the order information
system.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task: Use the Order Information System

Use the order information system to analyze various data related to your production orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad , execute the Monitor Production / Planned Order tile to open
the order information system.
First, get an overview of the selectable lists and the various selection options.
Then carry out any evaluations for different lists and with different selection parameters.
For example, evaluate the documented goods movements, the automatic goods
movements, the order headers, the components, the operations, and the confirmations
for your production supervisor P## in plant 1010.
Display the data also in the object overview.
a) On the Production Order Information System screen, choose the required list and enter
required selection parameters.
Then choose Execute to display the corresponding list report.

2. Save your selection settings as variants, and change the layout in the list reports.
a) On the Production Order Information System screen, choose Save as Variant … to save
your selection settings.
Enter a variant name and a description and Save the variant.

b) In a list report, you can change the layout as follows:

Choose the > (Standard ALV Functions On) symbol, and then choose the Change
Layout … option for the layout symbol.
In the Change Layout window, you can select the required fields and define sort and
filter criteria. Then you can choose the Adopt (Enter) symbol to apply your changes or
Save As to save your changes as your own layout.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 323

 Unit 7
Exercise 30
Get an Overview of the Mass Processing
Functions

Business Scenario
As a production scheduler, you often have to process several production orders or planned
orders automatically or simultaneously. Mass processing functions are available for this
purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Get an Overview of the Functions and Options for Mass Processing
Get an overview of the various functions, options and settings for mass processing of
production and planned orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
First, get an overview of the selectable lists and the various selection options and selection
parameters.
Then, depending on the selected list and the settings for the Production Order and the
Planned Order flags, get an overview of the available mass processing functions, options
and settings.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 324

 Unit 7
Solution 30
Get an Overview of the Mass Processing
Functions

Business Scenario
As a production scheduler, you often have to process several production orders or planned
orders automatically or simultaneously. Mass processing functions are available for this
purpose.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Get an Overview of the Functions and Options for Mass Processing
Get an overview of the various functions, options and settings for mass processing of
production and planned orders.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Mass Processing Production Orders tile.
First, get an overview of the selectable lists and the various selection options and selection
parameters.
Then, depending on the selected list and the settings for the Production Order and the
Planned Order flags, get an overview of the available mass processing functions, options
and settings.
a) On the Selection tab of the Mass Processing Production Orders screen, choose various
lists and different settings for the Production Order and the Planned Order flags.
On the Mass Processing tab, check the available mass processing functions dependent
on the selected list and settings. Choose different mass processing functions and
check the available options and settings for these functions.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 325

 Unit 7
Exercise 31
Execute a Trigger Point

Business Scenario
You want to automate some functions at operation level. You use trigger points for this
purpose. As a prerequisite, you must maintain the corresponding settings in the routings and
in Customizing.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Check the Settings for a Trigger Point

In your routing for material T-FSP1## you defined a trigger point for the automatic insertion
of a reference operation set in the case of rework. Check the corresponding settings.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Routing tile to display the routing for
material T-FSP1## in plant 1010.

2. In the Operation Overview screen, select operation 0030 and navigate to the Trigger Point
Overview.
Write down the Trigger Point assigned to operation 0030 into the following table:
Description Functions

>

3. Select the Trigger Point and navigate to the Trigger Point Details.
Write down the settings for the activated trigger point function in the following table:
Function Function descrip- [Link] User sts Change Activa
tion

4. Display the parameters for the activated trigger function.

After what operation shall the reference operation set be inserted? Write down the
corresponding setting in the following table:
Field Value

After operation

Task 2: Check the Settings for a Reason for Variance

In Customizing, you defined a Reason for Variance to set an operation user status with the
confirmation of an operation. This user status allows to trigger a trigger point. Check the
corresponding settings.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 326

 Exercise 31: Execute a Trigger Point

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, open the Customizing activity
Define Reason for Variances and display the User Status assigned to the Reason of
Variance with the description Rework.
Write down the status in the following table:
Field Value

User status

Task 3: Execute the Trigger Point

You create a production order for material T-FSP1## and confirm the operations. When
confirming operation 0030, you enter a rework quantity and the reason for variance Rework
to execute the corresponding trigger point. Finally, you check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for material T-FSP1## in plant 1010 with order type YBM1.
Choose an order quantity of 5 PC and any end date.
Release and save the order and write down the order number.
Order number: __________________________________

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Confirm Production Order Operation tile to
perform time ticket confirmations for the operations of your production order.
Save the confirmations for operation 0010 and 0020 without changing the proposed data.
For operation 0030, change the yield to be confirmed from 5 to 4 PC, enter a rework
quantity of 1 PC and the reason for variance REWO Rework.
What information will be displayed when you save the confirmation for operation 0030?
____________________________________________________________________________

3. A rework operation has been inserted in the production order.

In the Enter Time Ticket for Production Order screen, enter the production order number
again.
The data for the confirmation of the rework operation will be proposed.
Save the confirmation.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Production Order tile to display the data
of your production order.
Check the data in the Operation Overview.
Has the rework operation been inserted in the operation overview?
_______________________________________________________________________

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 327

 Unit 7
Solution 31
Execute a Trigger Point

Business Scenario
You want to automate some functions at operation level. You use trigger points for this
purpose. As a prerequisite, you must maintain the corresponding settings in the routings and
in Customizing.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Check the Settings for a Trigger Point

In your routing for material T-FSP1## you defined a trigger point for the automatic insertion
of a reference operation set in the case of rework. Check the corresponding settings.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Display Routing tile to display the routing for
material T-FSP1## in plant 1010.
a) In the Display Routing: Initial Screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Plant 1010

2. In the Operation Overview screen, select operation 0030 and navigate to the Trigger Point
Overview.
Write down the Trigger Point assigned to operation 0030 into the following table:
Description Functions

>

a) Choose More → Goto → Trigger Point Overview.

You should find the following Trigger Point:
Description Functions

Rework X

3. Select the Trigger Point and navigate to the Trigger Point Details.
Write down the settings for the activated trigger point function in the following table:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 328

 Solution 31: Execute a Trigger Point

Function Function descrip- [Link] User sts Change Activa

tion

a) Choose More → Details → Trigger Point.

Function Function de- Syst. Sts User sts Change Activa
scription

X Insert refer- REWO +

ence opera-
tion set

4. Display the parameters for the activated trigger function.

After what operation shall the reference operation set be inserted? Write down the
corresponding setting in the following table:
Field Value

After operation

a) Choose the Parameters button.

The reference operation set shall be inserted after operation 0030:
Field Value

After operation 0030

Task 2: Check the Settings for a Reason for Variance

In Customizing, you defined a Reason for Variance to set an operation user status with the
confirmation of an operation. This user status allows to trigger a trigger point. Check the
corresponding settings.

1. In the Customizing environment of the backend system, open the Customizing activity
Define Reason for Variances and display the User Status assigned to the Reason of
Variance with the description Rework.
Write down the status in the following table:
Field Value

User status

a) Choose transaction SPRO and press the SAP Reference IMG button.
In the Display IMG screen, choose the following menu path:
Production → Shop Floor Control → Operations → Confirmation → Define Reasons for
Variance.
In the Reason for variance: Overview screen, select the Reason for Variance with the
description Rework and double-click on the folder User Status.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 329

Unit 7: Information Systems, Mass Processing, and Automation

The following user status should be assigned:

Field Value

User status REWO

Task 3: Execute the Trigger Point

You create a production order for material T-FSP1## and confirm the operations. When
confirming operation 0030, you enter a rework quantity and the reason for variance Rework
to execute the corresponding trigger point. Finally, you check the result.

1. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Create Production Order tile to create a
production order for material T-FSP1## in plant 1010 with order type YBM1.
Choose an order quantity of 5 PC and any end date.
Release and save the order and write down the order number.
Order number: __________________________________
a) Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Choose Continue and enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header
screen:
Field Value

Total Qty 5

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Release Order to create and release the order.

Finally, choose Save to save the order. The order number will be displayed.

2. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Confirm Production Order Operation tile to
perform time ticket confirmations for the operations of your production order.
Save the confirmations for operation 0010 and 0020 without changing the proposed data.
For operation 0030, change the yield to be confirmed from 5 to 4 PC, enter a rework
quantity of 1 PC and the reason for variance REWO Rework.
What information will be displayed when you save the confirmation for operation 0030?
____________________________________________________________________________
a) In the Enter Time Ticket for Production Order screen, select your confirmations via the
order and the operation number.

b) When you save operation 0030, the Trigger Point Function window is displayed. You
get the information that a reference operation set will be inserted in the production
order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 330

 Solution 31: Execute a Trigger Point

3. A rework operation has been inserted in the production order.

In the Enter Time Ticket for Production Order screen, enter the production order number
again.
The data for the confirmation of the rework operation will be proposed.
Save the confirmation.
a) No further information is needed for this exercise step.

4. In the SAP Fiori Launchpad, execute the Change Production Order tile to display the data
of your production order.
Check the data in the Operation Overview.
Has the rework operation been inserted in the operation overview?
_______________________________________________________________________
a) The rework operation has been inserted after operation 0030.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 331

 Unit 8
Exercise 32
Split Production Orders

Business Scenario
You create a production order to produce a finished product. During production you have to
split this order several times for different reasons (capacity shortage, important sales order,
quality out of range).

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Production Order

Create and release a production order.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create a production order for material
T-FSP1## in plant 1010 with order type YBM1.
Choose an order quantity of 20 PC and any end date.
Release and save your production order and write down the order number.
Order number: _____________________________

Task 2: Split the Production Order

Because of capacity shortage you can only produce half of the quantity. Split your production
order. Create a child order to produce the other half of the quantity one week later.

1. Choose transaction CO02 to change your production order.

Navigate to the operation overview and select the first operation 0010.
Choose Functions → Split Order.
In the Order Split screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Split Method Split with Same Material

Material for Cost Transfer / By Product T-TRANS-##

Split Quantity 10 PC

Scheduling of Child Order /Basic End Date One week later than proposed

Choose the Split Order button and save the order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 332

 Exercise 32: Split Production Orders

Note:
The by-product is handled in batches, and the automatically assigned batch is
individually valuated with the planned costs up to the split operation and
proportional to the split quantity.

Task 3: Analyze the Parent Order

Analyze the result of the order split for the parent order.

1. Choose transaction CO02 to display your production order.

Your parent order and your child order are displayed in a Split Hierarchy in the order
header.
The parent order has an expected yield deviation of 10 PC corresponding to the split
quantity:
Field Value

Short/Expc. Rcpt 10-

The parent order has the new status SPLT Split in the order header and in the split
operation.

2. Navigate to the operation overview of the parent order.

The operation quantities are reduced by the split quantity to 10 PC for each operation.

3. Navigate to the component overview of the parent order.

The required quantities are proportionally reduced with respect to the split quantity.
The by-product batch is assigned with the negative split quantity and movement type 531
(goods receipt for by-product, see details for by-product).

Task 4: Analyze the Child Order

Analyze the result of the order split for the child order.

1. Double-click your child order in the Split Hierarchy.

The child order has a total quantity corresponding to the split quantity.
Field Value

Total Qty 10

The child order has the new status CSPL Created by splitting in the order header.
Furthermore, the child order has the status CRTD Created. It is not released.

2. Navigate to the operation overview of the child order.

The operation quantities correspond to the split quantity.

3. Navigate to the component overview of the child order.

The by-product batch is assigned with the split quantity, the backflush indicator and
movement type 261 (automatic goods issue for by-product during the later confirmation
of the operation, see details for by-product).

Task 5: Create a Sales Order

Create a sales order for your product.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 333

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

1. Choose transaction VA01 to create a sales order.

Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Order Type OR

Sales Organization 1010

Distribution Channel 10

Division 00

On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following header data:
Field Value

Sold-to-Party 10100001

[Link] 10100001

Cust. Reference GR##

Req. [Link] In approx. 3 weeks

On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following item data:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Order Quantity 1 PC

Save your sales order and write down the order number.
Sales order number: ____________________________

Task 6: Execute Confirmations and Split the Parent Order Again

Now you start the execution and confirmation of your parent order. During production, you
have to split your parent order again A part of the quantity has to be assigned to your sales
order in another child order.

1. Choose transaction CO11N to perform a time ticket confirmation for operation 0010 and
enter the following data:
Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0010

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Check and accept the proposed Yield of 10 PC and the proposed Activities.
Save the confirmation.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 334

 Exercise 32: Split Production Orders

2. Perform another time ticket confirmation with the following data:

Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0020

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Change the proposed Yield from of 10 PC to 9 PC.

Save the confirmation.

3. Choose transaction CO02 to change your parent production order.

Navigate to the operation overview and select the second operation 0020.
Choose Functions → Split Order
In the Order Split screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Split Method Split with Same Material

Order Parameters Child Order / Sales Order / Sales order number / 10

SO Item

Material for Cost Transfer / By Product T-TRANS-##

Split Quantity 1 PC

Scheduling of Child Order /Basic End Date e.g. two weeks later than proposed

Choose the Split Order button.

The following message is displayed: Child order is created for another sales
order.
Press Enter to confirm the message.
In the Selection of Start Operation for Child Order dialog box, check and accept the
proposed operation 0020.
Save your production order.

4. Choose transaction CO02 again to analyze the result of the order split for the parent order
and the new child order.

5. Finally, choose transaction CO11N again to perform the final time ticket confirmation for
operation 0020.
Enter the following data:
Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0020

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 335

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

Field Value

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Accept the proposed Yield of 0 PC.

Save the confirmation.

Task 7: Execute Confirmations and Split the Parent Order Again

You continue the execution and confirmation of your parent production order. You have to
split your parent order again, because for a part of the quantity the quality is out of range. You
split this quantity to a child order for the production of another material.

1. Choose transaction CO11N to perform a time ticket confirmation for operation 0030.
Enter the following data:
Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0030

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Change the proposed Yield from of 9 PC to 7 PC.

Save the confirmation.

2. Choose transaction CO02 to change your parent production order.

Navigate to the operation overview and select the third operation 0030.
Choose Functions → Split Order.
In the Order Split screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Split Method Split with Other Material

Order Parameters Child Order / Material T-FSP1##

Material for Cost Transfer / By Product T-TRANS-##

Split Quantity 1 PC

Scheduling of Child Order /Basic End Date e.g. accept proposed date

Choose the Split Order button.

In the Selection of Start Operation for Child Order dialog box, change the proposal for the
start operation. Select operation 0030.
Save your production order.

3. Again, choose transaction CO02 to analyze the result of the order split for the parent
order and the new child order.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 336

 Exercise 32: Split Production Orders

Task 8: Split the Parent Order Again

You continue the execution of your parent production order. You split your parent order
again, because for a part of the quantity the quality is out of range again. You split this
quantity to the warehouse for a later decision how to use it.

1. Choose transaction CO02 to change your parent production order.

Navigate to the operation overview and select the third operation 0030.
Choose Functions → Split Order.
In the Order Split screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Split Method Split to Warehouse

Material for Cost Transfer / By Product T-TRANS-##

Split Quantity 1 PC

Choose the Split Order button.

Save your production order.

2. Choose transaction CO02 to analyze the result of the order split.

No new child order was created in that split scenario.
A goods receipt for the by-product batch was posted directly to stock (movement type
531). In the Split Hierarchy in the order header you can see the corresponding material
document number.
Double click the material document number to get details.

3. Finally, choose transaction CO11N again to perform the final time ticket confirmation for
operation 0030.
Enter the following data:
Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0030

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Accept the proposed Yield of 0 PC.

Save the confirmation.

Task 9: Perform further Analysis on the Order Split

You can perform further analysis and activities related to your order split scenario.

1. Choose transaction MMBE and analyze the stock overview for your by-product T-TRANS-
##.

2. Release your first child order.

Then confirm the first operation to backflush the corresponding by-product batch.
Finally, check the stock overview for the by-product again.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 337

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

3. Split your first child order and check the result in the Split Hierarchy.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 338

 Unit 8
Solution 32
Split Production Orders

Business Scenario
You create a production order to produce a finished product. During production you have to
split this order several times for different reasons (capacity shortage, important sales order,
quality out of range).

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Create a Production Order

Create and release a production order.

1. In the backend system, choose transaction CO01 to create a production order for material
T-FSP1## in plant 1010 with order type YBM1.
Choose an order quantity of 20 PC and any end date.
Release and save your production order and write down the order number.
Order number: _____________________________
a) Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Production Plant 1010

Order Type YBM1

Enter the following data in the Production order Create: Header screen:
Field Value

Total Qty 20

Basic Dates / End choose any date in the near future

Choose Release Order to create and release the order.

Finally, choose Save to save the order. The order number will be displayed.

Task 2: Split the Production Order

Because of capacity shortage you can only produce half of the quantity. Split your production
order. Create a child order to produce the other half of the quantity one week later.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 339

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

1. Choose transaction CO02 to change your production order.

Navigate to the operation overview and select the first operation 0010.
Choose Functions → Split Order.
In the Order Split screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Split Method Split with Same Material

Material for Cost Transfer / By Product T-TRANS-##

Split Quantity 10 PC

Scheduling of Child Order /Basic End Date One week later than proposed

Choose the Split Order button and save the order.

Note:
The by-product is handled in batches, and the automatically assigned batch is
individually valuated with the planned costs up to the split operation and
proportional to the split quantity.

a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

Task 3: Analyze the Parent Order

Analyze the result of the order split for the parent order.

1. Choose transaction CO02 to display your production order.

Your parent order and your child order are displayed in a Split Hierarchy in the order
header.
The parent order has an expected yield deviation of 10 PC corresponding to the split
quantity:
Field Value

Short/Expc. Rcpt 10-

The parent order has the new status SPLT Split in the order header and in the split
operation.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

2. Navigate to the operation overview of the parent order.

The operation quantities are reduced by the split quantity to 10 PC for each operation.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Navigate to the component overview of the parent order.

The required quantities are proportionally reduced with respect to the split quantity.
The by-product batch is assigned with the negative split quantity and movement type 531
(goods receipt for by-product, see details for by-product).
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 340

 Solution 32: Split Production Orders

Task 4: Analyze the Child Order

Analyze the result of the order split for the child order.

1. Double-click your child order in the Split Hierarchy.

The child order has a total quantity corresponding to the split quantity.
Field Value

Total Qty 10

The child order has the new status CSPL Created by splitting in the order header.
Furthermore, the child order has the status CRTD Created. It is not released.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

2. Navigate to the operation overview of the child order.

The operation quantities correspond to the split quantity.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Navigate to the component overview of the child order.

The by-product batch is assigned with the split quantity, the backflush indicator and
movement type 261 (automatic goods issue for by-product during the later confirmation
of the operation, see details for by-product).
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

Task 5: Create a Sales Order

Create a sales order for your product.

1. Choose transaction VA01 to create a sales order.

Enter the following data in the initial screen:
Field Value

Order Type OR

Sales Organization 1010

Distribution Channel 10

Division 00

On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following header data:
Field Value

Sold-to-Party 10100001

[Link] 10100001

Cust. Reference GR##

Req. [Link] In approx. 3 weeks

On the Create Standard Order: Overview screen, enter the following item data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 341

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

Field Value

Material T-FSP1##

Order Quantity 1 PC

Save your sales order and write down the order number.
Sales order number: ____________________________
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

Task 6: Execute Confirmations and Split the Parent Order Again

Now you start the execution and confirmation of your parent order. During production, you
have to split your parent order again A part of the quantity has to be assigned to your sales
order in another child order.

1. Choose transaction CO11N to perform a time ticket confirmation for operation 0010 and
enter the following data:
Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0010

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Check and accept the proposed Yield of 10 PC and the proposed Activities.
Save the confirmation.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

2. Perform another time ticket confirmation with the following data:

Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0020

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Change the proposed Yield from of 10 PC to 9 PC.

Save the confirmation.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Choose transaction CO02 to change your parent production order.

Navigate to the operation overview and select the second operation 0020.
Choose Functions → Split Order
In the Order Split screen, enter the following data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 342

 Solution 32: Split Production Orders

Field Value

Split Method Split with Same Material

Order Parameters Child Order / Sales Order / Sales order number / 10

SO Item

Material for Cost Transfer / By Product T-TRANS-##

Split Quantity 1 PC

Scheduling of Child Order /Basic End Date e.g. two weeks later than proposed

Choose the Split Order button.

The following message is displayed: Child order is created for another sales
order.
Press Enter to confirm the message.
In the Selection of Start Operation for Child Order dialog box, check and accept the
proposed operation 0020.
Save your production order.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

4. Choose transaction CO02 again to analyze the result of the order split for the parent order
and the new child order.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

5. Finally, choose transaction CO11N again to perform the final time ticket confirmation for
operation 0020.
Enter the following data:
Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0020

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Accept the proposed Yield of 0 PC.

Save the confirmation.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

Task 7: Execute Confirmations and Split the Parent Order Again

You continue the execution and confirmation of your parent production order. You have to
split your parent order again, because for a part of the quantity the quality is out of range. You
split this quantity to a child order for the production of another material.

1. Choose transaction CO11N to perform a time ticket confirmation for operation 0030.
Enter the following data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 343

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0030

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Change the proposed Yield from of 9 PC to 7 PC.

Save the confirmation.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

2. Choose transaction CO02 to change your parent production order.

Navigate to the operation overview and select the third operation 0030.
Choose Functions → Split Order.
In the Order Split screen, enter the following data:
Field Value

Split Method Split with Other Material

Order Parameters Child Order / Material T-FSP1##

Material for Cost Transfer / By Product T-TRANS-##

Split Quantity 1 PC

Scheduling of Child Order /Basic End Date e.g. accept proposed date

Choose the Split Order button.

In the Selection of Start Operation for Child Order dialog box, change the proposal for the
start operation. Select operation 0030.
Save your production order.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Again, choose transaction CO02 to analyze the result of the order split for the parent
order and the new child order.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

Task 8: Split the Parent Order Again

You continue the execution of your parent production order. You split your parent order
again, because for a part of the quantity the quality is out of range again. You split this
quantity to the warehouse for a later decision how to use it.

1. Choose transaction CO02 to change your parent production order.

Navigate to the operation overview and select the third operation 0030.
Choose Functions → Split Order.
In the Order Split screen, enter the following data:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 344

 Solution 32: Split Production Orders

Field Value

Split Method Split to Warehouse

Material for Cost Transfer / By Product T-TRANS-##

Split Quantity 1 PC

Choose the Split Order button.

Save your production order.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

2. Choose transaction CO02 to analyze the result of the order split.

No new child order was created in that split scenario.
A goods receipt for the by-product batch was posted directly to stock (movement type
531). In the Split Hierarchy in the order header you can see the corresponding material
document number.
Double click the material document number to get details.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Finally, choose transaction CO11N again to perform the final time ticket confirmation for
operation 0030.
Enter the following data:
Field Value

Order Number of parent order

Operation 0030

[Link] Automatic final confirmation

Accept the proposed Yield of 0 PC.

Save the confirmation.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

Task 9: Perform further Analysis on the Order Split

You can perform further analysis and activities related to your order split scenario.

1. Choose transaction MMBE and analyze the stock overview for your by-product T-TRANS-
##.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

2. Release your first child order.

Then confirm the first operation to backflush the corresponding by-product batch.
Finally, check the stock overview for the by-product again.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Split your first child order and check the result in the Split Hierarchy.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 345

 Unit 8
Exercise 33
Create Shift Notes and Shift Reports

Business Scenario
As a production supervisor, you have to document all important information and events
pertinent to or occurring within a shift. Therefore, you decide to use shift notes and shift
reports.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Display the Settings for Shift Notes and Shift Reports in a Work Center
You want to be able to create shift notes and shift reports for special work centers. Therefore,
you assigned shift note types and shift report types to these work centers.

1. Choose transaction CR02 to display work center T-BK1## in plant 1010.

Write down the assigned shift note type and shift report type:
Field Value

Shift Note Type

Shift Report Type

Task 2: Create Shift Notes

You have to create shift notes during your daily work to document important events occurring
within your shift.

1. Choose transaction SHN1 to create a shift note for work center T-BK1##.

2. In the comment field, an example long text is automatically inserted.

This text is assigned to the shift note type in Customizing.
Also, the user information and the creation time have been automatically assigned.

3. Report the start and the end of the event.

Set the Specify End indicator and enter the following dates and times:
Start Date Start Time End Date End Time

today [Link] today [Link]

4. Assign the following shift note category:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 346

 Exercise 33: Create Shift Notes and Shift Reports

Category

Shift note category A

A long text has been assigned to this category in Customizing. Choose the Information
button to copy this text to the shift note comment.

5. Assign the following reference object:

Field Value

Reference Object Production Order

Production Order Enter any existing order number

Another long text is automatically inserted in the comment field. This text has been
assigned to the reference object in Customizing.
Choose the Display Object button to display the production order.

6. Enter your own comment manually in the comment field.

With the button Attach Text Module you could insert pre-defined standard texts.

7. Choose the Send button to send a link to the shift note as e-mail.
The shift note will be sent when you save the shift note.

8. Choose the Display as PDF button to display your shift note as PDF.
The PDF will be displayed when you save the shift note.
Save your shift note.

9. In the Create Document and Send dialog box, choose e.g. the following recipient:
Recipient Type

S4225-## (your user) SAP Logon Name

Press the Send … button.

A link to your shift note will be send to your workplace (transaction SBWP). Your shift note
will also be displayed as PDF.

10. Create more shift notes for your work center T-BK1##. The one for which you created a
shift note earlier in the exercise.
Assign e.g. other categories and other reference objects.

Task 3: List your Shift Notes

You use the List Processing to create various shift note lists for different selection criteria.
You define variants to make the use of the List Processing more effective.

1. Choose transaction SHN4 to display the selection screens for the List Processing of shift
notes.
Three different selection screens are available: Basic Search, Advanced Search,
Comprehensive Search.
Get an overview of the selection criteria available in the three different selection screens.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 347

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

Use all three selection screens to create your own shift note lists for different selection
criteria.
In a shift note list, note the available functions (create, copy, display, change, send, PDF,
print).

2. Go to the Advanced Search and define the following search criteria:

Field Value

Work Center T-BK1##

Start in the Past 8 Days

Choose Goto → Variants → Save As Variant … to save your selection criteria as variant:
Field Value

Variant Name WC T-BK1##

Description Variant for work cent. T-BK1##

Save your variant.

Choose Goto → Variants → Define Start Variant … to define your variant as user specific
start variant:
Field Value

User-Specific Variant WC T-BK1##

3. Leave the List Processing and enter it again.

The selection screen for Advanced Search and your own selection criteria are
automatically set.

Task 4: Use the Shift Note Cockpit

You use the Shift Note Cockpit to supervise up to 6 different shift note lists at the same time.

1. Choose transaction SHN5 to display the selection screen of the Shift Note Cockpit.
You can assign up to 6 different shift note list variants to be displayed in the cockpit.
Theses shift note lists can be displayed in tabs or in one single overview screen.
You can define a time interval for an automatic refresh of the shift note lists.

2. When you enter the selection screen of the cockpit, some list variants are already
assigned. This assignment is defined in a standard variant for the Shift Note Cockpit.
Additionally, assign your own shift note list variant WC T-BK1##.
Choose Goto → Variants for Shift Note Cockpit → Save As Variant … to save your settings
as a new Shift Note Cockpit variant:
Field Value

Variant Name GR## COCKPIT

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 348

 Exercise 33: Create Shift Notes and Shift Reports

Field Value

Description GR## Shift Note Cockpit

Save your variant.

Choose Goto → Variants for Shift Note Cockpit → Define Start Variant … to define your
variant as user specific start variant:
Field Value

User-Specific Variant GR## COCKPIT

3. Leave the Shift Note Cockpit and enter it again.

Your list variants are automatically set.

4. Now choose Execute to display the selected shift note lists in the Shift Note Cockpit.
Display the shift note lists in Tabs and in the Overview.

Task 5: Create Shift Reports

At the end of your shift you create shift reports for your work centers. This shift reports
contain e.g. shift notes, confirmations, aggregated quantities and activities, and goods
movements.

1. Choose transaction SHR1 to create a shift report for your work center T-BK1##.
The current shift may be proposed, but choose a different evaluation period so that all
activities of the current week will be included:
Field Value

Start Date Last Monday

Start Time [Link]

End Date Today

End Time Current Time

Choose Settings for Preview to check the corresponding preview settings.

Choose Preview to create a preview of your shift report.
In the preview, analyze the information that is available in the different sections of the
navigation tree. View the lists for the different sections and navigate into some of the
listed objects (e.g. shift notes, confirmations).

2. Choose the Generate Shift Report button to generate your shift report.
Save your shift report.
Finally, Sign your shift report with your SAP user ID and your SAP password.

3. Some information has changed or has since been updated. Discard your shift report. You
have to confirm this activity with your digital signature.

4. After you have discarded your shift report, you can generate, save and sign a new shift
report for the same evaluation period.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 349

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

Task 6: List your Shift Reports

You use the List Processing to create various shift report lists for different selection criteria.

1. Choose transaction SHR4 to display the selection screen for the List Processing of shift
reports.
Get an overview of the available selection criteria.
Create your own shift report lists for different selection criteria. For example, create a list
regarding your work center T-BK1##.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 350

 Unit 8
Solution 33
Create Shift Notes and Shift Reports

Business Scenario
As a production supervisor, you have to document all important information and events
pertinent to or occurring within a shift. Therefore, you decide to use shift notes and shift
reports.

Note:
In this exercise, when a value or object name contains ##, replace ## by the
number, your trainer assigned to you.

Task 1: Display the Settings for Shift Notes and Shift Reports in a Work Center
You want to be able to create shift notes and shift reports for special work centers. Therefore,
you assigned shift note types and shift report types to these work centers.

1. Choose transaction CR02 to display work center T-BK1## in plant 1010.

Write down the assigned shift note type and shift report type:
Field Value

Shift Note Type

Shift Report Type

a) The following shift note type and shift report type should be assigned:
Field Value

Shift Note Type SN

Shift Report Type S4M_001

Note:
Shift note types and shift report types have to be defined in Customizing.

Task 2: Create Shift Notes

You have to create shift notes during your daily work to document important events occurring
within your shift.

1. Choose transaction SHN1 to create a shift note for work center T-BK1##.
a) No further information is needed for this exercise step.

2. In the comment field, an example long text is automatically inserted.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 351

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

This text is assigned to the shift note type in Customizing.

Also, the user information and the creation time have been automatically assigned.
a) No further information is needed for this exercise step.

3. Report the start and the end of the event.

Set the Specify End indicator and enter the following dates and times:
Start Date Start Time End Date End Time

today [Link] today [Link]

a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

4. Assign the following shift note category:

Category

Shift note category A

A long text has been assigned to this category in Customizing. Choose the Information
button to copy this text to the shift note comment.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

5. Assign the following reference object:

Field Value

Reference Object Production Order

Production Order Enter any existing order number

Another long text is automatically inserted in the comment field. This text has been
assigned to the reference object in Customizing.
Choose the Display Object button to display the production order.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

6. Enter your own comment manually in the comment field.

With the button Attach Text Module you could insert pre-defined standard texts.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

7. Choose the Send button to send a link to the shift note as e-mail.
The shift note will be sent when you save the shift note.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

8. Choose the Display as PDF button to display your shift note as PDF.
The PDF will be displayed when you save the shift note.
Save your shift note.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

9. In the Create Document and Send dialog box, choose e.g. the following recipient:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 352

 Solution 33: Create Shift Notes and Shift Reports

Recipient Type

S4225-## (your user) SAP Logon Name

Press the Send … button.

A link to your shift note will be send to your workplace (transaction SBWP). Your shift note
will also be displayed as PDF.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

10. Create more shift notes for your work center T-BK1##. The one for which you created a
shift note earlier in the exercise.
Assign e.g. other categories and other reference objects.
a) No further information is needed for this exercise step.

Task 3: List your Shift Notes

You use the List Processing to create various shift note lists for different selection criteria.
You define variants to make the use of the List Processing more effective.

1. Choose transaction SHN4 to display the selection screens for the List Processing of shift
notes.
Three different selection screens are available: Basic Search, Advanced Search,
Comprehensive Search.
Get an overview of the selection criteria available in the three different selection screens.
Use all three selection screens to create your own shift note lists for different selection
criteria.
In a shift note list, note the available functions (create, copy, display, change, send, PDF,
print).
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

2. Go to the Advanced Search and define the following search criteria:

Field Value

Work Center T-BK1##

Start in the Past 8 Days

Choose Goto → Variants → Save As Variant … to save your selection criteria as variant:
Field Value

Variant Name WC T-BK1##

Description Variant for work cent. T-BK1##

Save your variant.

Choose Goto → Variants → Define Start Variant … to define your variant as user specific
start variant:

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 353

Unit 8: Further and Advanced Functions

Field Value

User-Specific Variant WC T-BK1##

a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Leave the List Processing and enter it again.

The selection screen for Advanced Search and your own selection criteria are
automatically set.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

Task 4: Use the Shift Note Cockpit

You use the Shift Note Cockpit to supervise up to 6 different shift note lists at the same time.

1. Choose transaction SHN5 to display the selection screen of the Shift Note Cockpit.
You can assign up to 6 different shift note list variants to be displayed in the cockpit.
Theses shift note lists can be displayed in tabs or in one single overview screen.
You can define a time interval for an automatic refresh of the shift note lists.
a) No further information is needed for this exercise step.

2. When you enter the selection screen of the cockpit, some list variants are already
assigned. This assignment is defined in a standard variant for the Shift Note Cockpit.
Additionally, assign your own shift note list variant WC T-BK1##.
Choose Goto → Variants for Shift Note Cockpit → Save As Variant … to save your settings
as a new Shift Note Cockpit variant:
Field Value

Variant Name GR## COCKPIT

Description GR## Shift Note Cockpit

Save your variant.

Choose Goto → Variants for Shift Note Cockpit → Define Start Variant … to define your
variant as user specific start variant:
Field Value

User-Specific Variant GR## COCKPIT

a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Leave the Shift Note Cockpit and enter it again.

Your list variants are automatically set.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

4. Now choose Execute to display the selected shift note lists in the Shift Note Cockpit.
Display the shift note lists in Tabs and in the Overview.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 354

 Solution 33: Create Shift Notes and Shift Reports

Task 5: Create Shift Reports

At the end of your shift you create shift reports for your work centers. This shift reports
contain e.g. shift notes, confirmations, aggregated quantities and activities, and goods
movements.

1. Choose transaction SHR1 to create a shift report for your work center T-BK1##.
The current shift may be proposed, but choose a different evaluation period so that all
activities of the current week will be included:
Field Value

Start Date Last Monday

Start Time [Link]

End Date Today

End Time Current Time

Choose Settings for Preview to check the corresponding preview settings.

Choose Preview to create a preview of your shift report.
In the preview, analyze the information that is available in the different sections of the
navigation tree. View the lists for the different sections and navigate into some of the
listed objects (e.g. shift notes, confirmations).
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

2. Choose the Generate Shift Report button to generate your shift report.
Save your shift report.
Finally, Sign your shift report with your SAP user ID and your SAP password.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

3. Some information has changed or has since been updated. Discard your shift report. You
have to confirm this activity with your digital signature.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

4. After you have discarded your shift report, you can generate, save and sign a new shift
report for the same evaluation period.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

Task 6: List your Shift Reports

You use the List Processing to create various shift report lists for different selection criteria.

1. Choose transaction SHR4 to display the selection screen for the List Processing of shift
reports.
Get an overview of the available selection criteria.
Create your own shift report lists for different selection criteria. For example, create a list
regarding your work center T-BK1##.
a) Follow the instruction given in the exercise.

© Copyright. All rights reserved. 355